CEEQUAL V5 Assessment Manual For UK Ireland Projects - FINAL 24-08-12 With Covers

CEEQUAL
IMPROVING SUSTAINABILITY
Assessment Manual for

UK & Ireland Projects
Version 5
August 2012
INTRODUCTION
This Assessment Manual contains the Version 5 CEEQUAL Assessment questions and guidance for the
assessment of civil engineering, infrastructure, landscaping or public realm projects located in the UK and
Ireland and that have a clearly defined project boundary and timescale. It must be read in conjunction with the
separate CEEQUAL Assessment Process Handbook for Assessors and verifiers, which sets out the purpose
and origins of CEEQUAL, and the fundamental principles and process of a CEEQUAL Assessment and its
verification.
Throughout the Assessment Manual, wherever practicable, references are provided to relevant UK or Irish law
and guidance. Within the UK, there is a wide range of regional variation, some regulations being applicable
across the UK, some only to a single region or country within the UK. In some sections where it has been
practical to do so these regional variations are listed in detail, whereas in others just one has been quoted with
or equivalent added. These equivalents within the UK and Ireland will continue to be progressively addressed
in future updates (either within the Assessment Manual or as separate guidance sheets) and we invite users to
write in with any details that they are able to supply please write to Ian Nicholson, CEEQUAL Technical
Manager at [email protected].
What is different in Version 5 of the Assessment Manual for Projects?

Version 5 completes CEEQUALs transition from environmental assessment and awards to a sustainability
assessment and awards scheme with the addition of a new, optional Project Strategy Section. This means that
there are now two types of CEEQUAL Project Awards those that assess against Sections 1 to 9 (i.e. including
Project Strategy) and those that are restricted to Sections 2 to 9. The Awards available are listed in the
Assessment Process Handbook for Assessors and Verifiers, August 2012 revision.
There are seven main Version 5 upgrades in addition to the new Project Strategy Section.
The amended question set and scoping-out requirements make it much easier to apply CEEQUAL to
marine and offshore projects (such as harbours, pipelines, offshore wind farms and offshore oil and gas
projects).
In addition to consideration of impacts on the marine environment and the seabed, the Assessment
questions and guidance have also been amended to deal with impacts on the bed of estuaries, rivers
and freshwater lakes.
The previous twelve sections have been re-arranged, refined and consolidated, particularly to reflect
two major changes of emphasis in the civil engineering industry and profession the increasing
importance of community engagement and social impacts, and in the more-integrated approach to use
and management of all the physical resources deployed.
Wherever possible, we have sought to ease the Assessment process by improving the consistency of
how questions on related topics are asked and in improving how questions and guidance in this
Assessment Manual are presented.
A new weightings exercise and re-scoring of the questions have been undertaken.
With Version 5, to provide improved consistency, the question wording is identical in the International
and UK & Ireland Editions of the Version 5 Projects Manuals (around 30 were different in the Version 4
Editions). The prime difference between the UK & Ireland Edition and the International Edition is
therefore the provision of extensive guidance relevant to UK and Ireland practice, regulations and
guidance. Where appropriate, guidance is given on how the International wording can or should be
interpreted in the UK & Ireland Edition.
Questions that were designated as NSO (meaning No Scoping Out) in Version 4 are now called
Mandatory and are indicated by a (M) symbol in the top left corner of each question table. In multi-part
questions where not all parts of the questions are mandatory, only those parts that have a (M) symbol
below the question part number are mandatory.
The designation Version 5 of the Assessment Manual for Projects denotes that both the question set and
scores have been changed from Version 4. Although new questions have been added and others removed, the
principles of scoring and scoping-out established in previous versions of CEEQUAL have been maintained.
Assessors who have been using Version 4 will have to attend a free online upgrade course prior to their first
Version 5 Assessment.
Technical queries about operation of the Scheme

For technical queries about operation of the Scheme and/or on interpretations of this Manual, contact the
CEEQUAL Technical Manager, Ian Nicholson, on 01509 320100 or at [email protected].
CEEQUAL Ltd
Version 5 for distribution, August 2012
CEEQUAL Assessment Manual for UK & Ireland Projects
CONTENTS
Section & title
Page
Explanation of sets of initials
1.
Project Strategy
1.1 Overall strategy for the project concept and design
1.2 Overall strategy for construction
5
6
15
2.
Project Management
2.1 Basic principles
2.2 Sustainability management
2.3 Contractual and procurement processes
2.4 Delivering performance on environmental and social aspects
2.5 Communicating sustainability performance
19
19
20
24
27
30
3.
People and Communities

3.1 Brief and design
3.2 Consultation with stakeholders
3.3 Effects on neighbours and planning of mitigation measures
3.4 Implementation and monitoring during construction
3.5 Continuing engagement with relevant local interest groups
3.6 Effectiveness of the community engagement programme
3.7 Human environment, aesthetics and employment
32
32
33
35
38
41
43
44
4.
Land Use and Landscape

4.1 Basic principles on land use (whether above or below water)
4.2 Contamination of land and beds of the sea, estuaries, rivers & lakes
4.3 Flood risk
4.4 Basic principles on landscape issues
4.5 Landscape-related legal requirements
4.6 Implementation and management
4.7 Completion and aftercare
48
48
53
58
61
62
65
66
5.
The Historic Environment

5.1 Baseline studies
5.2 Legal requirements, planning guidance and consultation
5.3 Conservation and enhancement
5.4 Information dissemination and public access
68
69
70
71
75
6.
Ecology and Biodiversity

6.2 Legal requirements
6.3 Conservation and enhancement of biodiversity
6.4 Habitat creation measures
6.5 Monitoring and maintenance
77
77
80
82
84
86
CEEQUAL Ltd
7.
The Water Environment

7.2 Legal requirements
7.3 Protection of the freshwater and marine environments
7.4 Enhancement of the water environment
88
88
89
90
94
8.
Physical Resources Use and Management

8.2 Embodied impacts
8.3 Design for resource efficiency
8.4 Design for reduced energy consumption and carbon emissions in use
8.5 Energy and carbon performance on site
8.6 Water use
8.7 Responsible sourcing, re-use and recycling of materials
8.8 Minimising use and impacts of hazardous materials
8.9 Site Waste Management Planning & legal compliance
8.10 Wastes and management of arisings
96
96
99
100
105
107
109
112
117
118
122
9.
Transport
9.2 Operational transport
9.3 Construction transport, including nuisance and disruption
9.4 Minimising workforce travel
127
127
129
131
133
Document Revision /Issue History

Revision
Number
Reason for Issue
Date of Issue
Approved for Issue
V5.0
Upgrade from Version 4
24 August 2012
Roger Venables
Chief Executive
CEEQUAL Ltd
Explanation of sets of initials

AONB
BAP
BAT
BATNEEC
Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty

Biodiversity Action Plan
Best Available Technique
Best Available Technique Not Entailing
Excessive Cost
BRE
Building Research Establishment
CABERNET Concerted Action on Brownfield and
Economic Regeneration Network
CADW
The Welsh Government is historic
environment division.
CCW
Countryside Council for Wales
CDM
Construction (Design and Management)
Regulations
CL:AIRE
Contaminated Land: Application in Real
Environments
COSHH
Control of Substances Hazardous to
Health Regulations 2002
CRoW
Countryside and Rights of Way Act 2000
CSA
Canadian Standard Associations
CSR
Corporate Social Responsibility
DCLG
Department for Communities and Local
Government
Defra
Department for Environment, Food and
Rural Affairs
DETR
Department of the Environment,
Transport and the Regions (before
reorganisation in 2001)
DMRB
Design Manual for Roads and Bridges
DREAM
Defence Realm Environmental
Assessment Method
EC
European Commission
ECJ
European Court of Justice
EIA
Environmental Impact Assessment
EMAS
Eco-Management and Audit Scheme
EMS
Environmental Management System
ENCORD European Network of Construction
Companies for Research and
Development
EPA
Environmental Protection Act 1990
ES
Environmental Statement
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council
HAZOP
Hazard and Operability Studies
HIA
Health Impact Assessment
ICE
Institution of Civil Engineers
IEEM
Institute of Ecology and Environmental
Management
IFA
Institute of Field Archaeologists (in
Ireland)
IHBC
IT
ISO14001
IUCN
LBAP
LCA
LMS
LNR
LWP
(M)
MMO
MPA
NE
NGO
NIEA
NNR
NPPF
NRA
PEFC
PEMP
PPS
SEMP
SEPA
SFI
SiLC
SINC
SNH
SSSI
SuDS
SWMP
TIA
TPO
TRADA
UKCIP
VOC
WCA
WRAP
Institute of Historic Building Conservation

(in Ireland)
Information Technology
International Standard for Environmental
Management Systems
International Union for Conservation of
Nature
Local Biodiversity Action Plan
Life-Cycle Assessment
Landscape Management Strategy
Local Nature Reserve
Landscape Works Plan
Question is Mandatory
Marine Management Organisation
Major Projects Association
Natural England
Non-Governmental Organisation
Northern Ireland Environment Agency
(formerly the Environment & Heritage
Service, Northern Ireland)
National Nature Reserve
National Planning Policy Framework
National Roads Authority (in Ireland)
Programme for the Endorsement of
Forest Certification Schemes
Project Environmental Management Plan
Planning Policy Statement
Site Environmental Management Plan
Scottish Environment Protection Agency
Sustainable Forestry Initiative
Specialist in Land Condition
Site of Importance for Nature
Conservation
Scottish Natural Heritage
Site of Special Scientific Interest
Sustainable Drainage Systems
Site Waste Management Plan
Transport Impact Assessment
Tree Preservation Order
Timber Research and Development
Association
UK Climate Impacts Programme
Volatile Organic Compound
Wildlife & Countryside Act 1981 (as
amended)
Waste & Resources Action Programme
$ This $ symbol is used (with bold italic font) at the start of some notes to identify guidance about the
connection between the content of the Manual and the Assessment process and to distinguish these notes from
the main text on the content of the Assessment.
For example, at the end of the introduction to Section 4, the following note is given:
$ Refurbishment projects that use land beyond the existing boundary only for temporary site
compounds will need to carefully review the questions to decide if they are relevant or not, for instance
a site compound could generate additional flood risk or potential for contamination.
CEEQUAL Ltd
Section 1: Project Strategy
1. PROJECT STRATEGY
This section assesses how the project team has related their project to the wider sustainability agenda
surrounding civil engineering and infrastructure projects, including landscaping and the public realm and their
contribution to sustainable development.
$ Section 1 is currently an optional part of a CEEQUAL Project Assessment. There is therefore some
duplication of issues and guidance between this section and later sections in the Projects Manual so
that Sections 2 to 9 can stand alone. However, when a full sustainability Assessment is being
undertaken using this section alongside Sections 2 to 9, this section is complementary to all of the
others. Users are asked to accept this apparent duplication as a consequence of the optional nature of
Section 1.
As the Royal Academy of Engineerings Engineering for Sustainable Development: Guiding principles states: It
is increasingly recognised, in public discussion and political discourse, that many of the practices and lifestyles
of modern society particularly but not exclusively industrialised society simply cannot be sustained
indefinitely. We are exceeding the capacity of the planet to provide many of the resources we use and to
accommodate our emissions, while many of the planets inhabitants cannot meet even their most basic needs.
This problem, of recognising the need to live within constraints and to ensure more fairness in access to limited
resources, lies at the heart of the concepts of sustainability and sustainable development. ... Sustainable
development is the process of moving human activities to a pattern that can be sustained in perpetuity. It is an
approach to environmental and development issues that seeks to reconcile human needs with the capacity of
the planet to cope with the consequences of human activities.
The issues covered in Section 1 therefore include how the project team have related their project to:
the interests and concerns of the community(ies) in which it is to be constructed and operated;
the wider sustainability issues such as social, economic and environmental impacts at a scale beyond
those local to the project and the narrow interests of the project promoter; and
the design and construction strategies that they have adopted not only to perform well on
environmental and social issues but also whether the project can be characterised as a sustainable
development, that is one that contributes to society moving on a pathway towards long-term
sustainability and/or sustainable living the so-called pathway contribution.
The addition of Section 1 to the CEEQUAL Methodology means that a CEEQUAL Assessment now addresses
issues of social acceptability, and of how good an outcome, from a sustainability perspective, a project is likely
to provide when completed.
Section 1 prompts project teams to ask themselves such questions and to undertake studies of the project and
its likely impacts so that the results might then lead to improvements. In doing this, CEEQUAL, as a process
improvement methodology as well as a rating and awards scheme, is challenging project teams to deliver
project and process improvements, both on their current project being assessed under CEEQUAL, and over the
finished projects lifetime. They may conclude that their project is, as Question 1.1.7 considers:
providing a positive outcome that delivers for the community(ies) it serves the ability to achieve moresustainable living , and is therefore reversing some of the excessive impacts of the past; OR
provides a neutral outcome, one that is sustainable in itself and delivers, overall, neither worse
conditions for the community nor significantly better; OR
provides an outcome that makes matters worse in some respects (for example increased noise, carbon
emissions, resource consumption) without significant balancing benefits.
The verification and ratification of the Project Strategy section will therefore consider the merits of each project,
what the project team has done to assess what the right solution to their project brief should be, how close to
it their actual solution is, and how they have synthesised a view of the projects contribution to more-sustainable
living.
This means that there are likely to be occasions when the assessment and verification conclude that the project
is not contributing to more-sustainable living despite having received planning system approval.
If the project team conclude that their project has delivered the ability for the community(ies) it serves to move
forward on the pathway to more-sustainable living, and the verification concludes that the process to arrive at
that answer was appropriate and valid, then CEEQUAL acknowledges that an award covering Section 1 will be
seen to be giving a sustainability seal of approval.
Despite this, CEEQUAL as a rating system, and as an organisation, is not seeking to set itself up as an arbiter
of what constitutes a good project from a sustainability perspective, nor come to a view for each assessed
CEEQUAL Ltd
project about the wisdom of the planning system in allowing a project to go ahead such decisions are driven
by many different social, political and economic drivers and policies. On this basis, CEEQUAL will hold no
corporate views as to whether particular types of projects are good from a sustainability perspective, and
therefore whether they should or should not have received planning approval.
Section 1 is split into two parts the strategy for the project concept and design; and the strategy for the
construction stage. This approach enables consideration of this section in all CEEQUAL Assessments, not just
those that involve assessment of the Clients role.
1.1 Overall strategy for the project concept and design

It is well-known that decisions made early in the conception and design of civil engineering projects have the
greatest potential influence on the projects impacts both positive and negative because those decisions are
crucial to operational performance, often over a long operational life. For a project to make the best possible
contribution to more-sustainable living, to enhancing quality of life, to resource efficiency or to habitat
conservation and/or enhancement, it is vital that development of the overall economic, social and environmental
strategy for the project be led by the Client and started early in the overall project process.
Strategic decisions on a range of issues from, for example, project location through design for ease of
maintenance to sourcing of energy and water supplies, will have significant effects on the life-cycle impacts and
on the acceptability of a project to its surrounding communities.
In addition, setting the best organisational, geographical and time boundaries around such strategic decisions
will maximise project benefits and minimise adverse unintended consequences. If the right judgements are to
be made about the appropriateness of a project from a sustainability point of view, it is extremely important that
the decision boundaries for economic, social and environmental analysis of impacts and benefits are set in the
most appropriate place and time, so that the adverse externalities of the decisions are minimised and the
positive benefits maximised. Draw the boundary too tightly in time or space and there is a significant risk of
significant adverse impacts being ignored; but set it too widely and the scope of the Assessment may become
unmanageable.
Rigorously thinking through, early in the process, the relationship between the objectives of the Client for their
project and sustainability considerations may cost a little more on project development and design. However, it
is extremely likely to pay significant dividends for the project overall, whether from reduced objections, moreefficient operation or reduced cost of construction and/or maintenance. It is especially important for the Client
and Designers to recognise in their decision-making that a project built now will need to operate for the long
term and will be operating in a different society than ours. It is reasonable to assume that sustainability needs
will be even more-important than they are now, in areas such as a low-carbon economy, minimum water
demand, and an increased population.
The challenge is to identify and then deliver the best balance between economic, social and environmental
aspects of the project, with minimised or eliminated adverse effects and maximised uptake of positive
opportunities.
1.1.1 (M) PRINCIPLES OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
70 pts
Is there evidence that the Client and Designer have actively

adopted the principles of sustainable development in the planning
and design of the project?
Client
Design
Construct
70
If No, score 0. If Yes, score as indicated.

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
None Question is Mandatory.

The incorporation of sustainable development principles within a projects development requires
the consideration of a number of different issues. These can include effects of the project on the
local environment, impacts on society and the economic impacts of a project on the local
community during its operation when complete, during construction and during its eventual
decommissioning. Although operational considerations may be the most important, consideration
of the buildability aspects of the project by the Client and Designers can have an important
bearing on the viability of the project as a whole. Some desirable projects may be predicted to
have minimal adverse impacts and extensive positive impacts once built, but potentially showstopping adverse impacts during construction.
Other aspects can include choosing to refurbish existing infrastructure rather than demolition and
building new facilities, and/or improving the economic effectiveness and efficiency of existing
CEEQUAL Ltd
infrastructure.
A number of these issues are covered in more detail by other questions in Section 1 and in other
sections within CEEQUAL, so what this question is looking for is whether there is an overarching
objective within the Client and Designers to consider and adopt the broader concepts of
sustainable development within the project concept, decision-making and design. Such an
approach could be manifested through actions that create change and a project that enables
others to live a more-sustainable lifestyle (see also Question 1.1.7). The actions could include the
provision of low carbon electricity, or a cycle path running to and from convenient locations, or
anything in between.
As indicated at the beginning of Section 1, guidance on these matters is available in the Royal
Academy of Engineerings guide Engineering for Sustainable Development: Guiding Principles,
which is downloadable from the Academys website at
http://www.raeng.org.uk/education/vps/pdf/Engineering_for_Sustainable_ Development.pdf.
Although published back in 2005, the guiding principles remain largely fully applicable to civil
engineering and infrastructure projects now.
For strategic input from the European level, the EU Sustainable Development Strategy is
available at http://ec.europa.eu/environment/eussd/.
Guidance on UK policy and policies in the devolved administrations has to be gleaned from more
than one source sometimes Defra speaks for the whole of the UK and sometimes just for
England. Defras stance on sustainable development can be found on their website at
www.defra.gov.uk/environment/economy/sustainable/. Other information on government policy,
action and support on sustainable development is available at http://sd.defra.gov.uk.
Scottish, Welsh and Northern Ireland website links to their stance on sustainable development are
at:
http://www.scotland.gov.uk/Topics/Environment/SustainableDevelopment
http://wales.gov.uk/topics/sustainabledevelopment/?lang=en and
http://www.ofmdfmni.gov.uk/index/economic-policy/economic-policy-sustainabledevelopment.htm.
In February 2011, the Coalition Government published its vision for sustainable development and
a package of measures to deliver it through the Green Economy, action to tackle climate change,
protecting and enhancing the natural environment, and fairness and improving wellbeing.
Mainstreaming Sustainable Development is available as a pdf from
http://sd.defra.gov.uk/gov/vision/ and sets out the Governments vision for sustainable
development and measures to support it.
Current UK and English Government policies and actions on sustainable construction can be
found at www.bis.gov.uk/policies/business-sectors/construction.
In Ireland, the latest formal Sustainable Development Strategy was published in 1997 (available at
http://www.environ.ie/en/Environment/LocalAgenda21/PublicationsDocuments/FileDownLoad,182
5,en.pdf). However, in January 2012, the Irish Government started a consultation on A
Framework for Sustainable Development for Ireland with objectives to identify and prioritise
policy areas and mechanisms where a sustainable development approach will add value and
enable continuous improvement of quality of life for current and future generations and set out
clear measures, responsibilities and timelines in an implementation plan.
In the UK and Ireland, local authorities also often issue their own guidance on sustainable
development in their area.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a sustainable development policy that cascades into a project

sustainability framework coupled with evidence of how that policy has been implemented
with the design. Further evidence that this has received active consideration could include
design team meeting records, or a sustainability assessment or appraisal report.
CEEQUAL Ltd
1.1.2 (M) ECONOMIC IMPACTS AND BENEFITS ASSESSMENT

1.1.2 a)
(M)
14 pts
Client
Design
Construct
Is there evidence that the Client and/or Designers have undertaken

14
an economic impacts and benefits assessment of the project on a
wider scope than just the project owners interests?
Is there evidence that the assessment demonstrates significant
44
economic benefits of the project to wider society on the following or
similar issues that are relevant to the project?
1.1.2 b)
(M)
44 pts
(i) Promoting other beneficial development

(ii) Economic renewal and revitalisation of the
(iii) community in which the project is placed
(iv) Creation of new construction jobs, skills, apprenticeships
(v) or work experience opportunities
(vi) Creation of long-term, post-construction jobs and/or skills
enhancements
(vii) Reduction of travel times
(viii) Increased export opportunities
(ix) Efficiency improvements that have wide application.
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score 11 each up to a maximum of 4 features. If fewer than
four features apply to the project being assessed and significant
economic benefits of the project to wider society are demonstrated
on all of them, score 44.
1.1.2 c)
16 pts
Is there evidence that, where appropriate, actions to support the

results of these economic impacts and benefits assessments have
been included within relevant contract documentation?
16

Scope-out
Guidance
Question 1.1.2 a) and b) are Mandatory. For Question 1.1.2 b), the Assessor and Verifier
need to match the issues addressed to the project being assessed. For example, a water
treatment works will never reduce journey times. Question 1.1.2 c) can be scoped out only
if there are genuinely no issues to be addressed in Question 1.1.2 b).
CEEQUAL leaves to the Client their own economic analysis, justification and decision-making
about whether to proceed with a project it is the Clients business and CEEQUAL does not seek
to make judgements about that aspect of project development.
Question
Guidance
However, there is an increasing view that project teams should seek deliver genuine benefits to a
wider group than just the Clients narrow interests. An economic benefits assessment of the
project on a wider scope than just the project owners interests is likely to lead to identification of
opportunities to deliver enhanced value to the community in which the project is constructed and
will operate.
Issues that such an analysis is likely to have to cover to be of significance to the project and
community are listed in Question 1.1.2 b) but need not be limited to the aspects listed. The aim
should be for the study to be in scale with the nature, location, context and size of the project and
seek the greatest social good for the investment involved, without detracting from the Clients
economic case and benefits.
For the transport sector, the UK Department of Transport has extensive guidance on the conduct
of transport studies, whether economic, social or environmental see www.dft.gov.uk/webtag/.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a document entitled Economic Benefits Analysis or similar, with the
attributes indicated in Question 1.1.2 b) and the guidance. Alternatively, it could be a series
of less-broad analyses that, taken together, provide the high-level, strategic overview that
can provide significant input to the project concept and design.
Note that evidence for this question and Question 1.1.3 could be found in the results of a
combined economic and social impacts and benefits study.
CEEQUAL Ltd
1.1.3 (M) SOCIAL IMPACTS AND BENEFITS ASSESSMENT

1.1.3 a)
(M)
14 pts
Client
Design
Construct
Is there evidence that the Client and/or the Designers have

14
undertaken a social impacts and benefits assessment of the project
on a wider scope than just the project owners interests?
Is there evidence that the assessment demonstrates significant
social benefits of the project to wider society on the following or
similar issues that are relevant to the project?
44
(i) Renewal and revitalisation of the social fabric of the

community in which the project is placed
(ii) Enhancement of community quality of life
(iii) Developing local skills and capabilities
(iv) Provision of amenity features or community resources
(v) Reduction of flood risk
(vi) Improving local air quality
(vii) Reducing crime risks.
1.1.3 b)
(M)
44 pts
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score 11 each up to a maximum of 4 features. If fewer than
four features apply to the project being assessed and significant
social benefits of the project to wider society are demonstrated on
all of them, score 44.
1.1.3 c)
16 pts

results of these social impacts and benefits assessments have
been included within relevant contract documentation?
16

Questions 1.1.3 a) and b) are Mandatory. For Question 1.1.3 b), the Assessor and Verifier
need to match the issues addressed to the project being assessed. For example, a
Scope-out
chemical works or power station will never of itself reduce flood risk directly. Question
Guidance
1.1.3 c) can be scoped out only if there are genuinely no issues to be addressed in
Question 1.1.3 b).
The analysis of direct benefits to the Client arising from their project is not a matter assessed by
CEEQUAL. However, the non-economic aspects of the project justification, and therefore
decision-making about whether to proceed with a project have a wider context.
There is an increasing view that project teams should seek to deliver genuine benefits to a wider
group than just the Clients narrow interests, socially as well as economically. A social impacts
and benefits analysis and assessment of the project on a wider scope than just the project
owners interests is likely to lead to identification of opportunities to deliver enhanced social
benefits to the community in which the project is constructed and will operate.
Question
Guidance
Issues that such an analysis is likely to have to cover to be of significance to the project and
community are listed in Question 1.1.3 b) but need not be limited to the aspects listed. The aim
should be for the study to be in scale with the nature, location, context and size of the project and
seek the greatest social good for the investment involved, without detracting from and more
likely enhancing the Clients case to the planning authority. Equality impact assessments should
be included.
As a guide, the Welsh Government has a Community Benefits Tool to assist in putting a value on
social benefits see https://www.buy4wales.co.uk/PRP/general/strategy/procstrat/
communitybenefits.html. For the transport sector, the UK Department of Transport has extensive
guidance on the conduct of transport studies, whether economic, social or environmental see
www.dft.gov.uk/webtag/.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a document entitled Social Impacts and Benefits Analysis or similar
with the attributes indicated in Question 1.1.3 b) and the guidance. Alternatively, it could
be a series of less-broad analyses that, taken together, provide the high-level, strategic
overview that can provide significant input to the project concept and design. Note that
evidence for this question and Question 1.1.2 could be found in the results of a combined
economic and social impacts and benefits study.
CEEQUAL Ltd
1.1.4 (M) ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND BENEFITS ASSESSMENT
1.1.4 a)
(M)
12 pts
Client
Design
Construct
Have the Client and/or the Designers undertaken an environmental

12
impacts and benefits assessment of the project on a wider scope
than just the project owners interests and appropriate to the
nature, scale, design life and location of the project, including
assessments of possible enhancements to the local environment?
Is there evidence that the promises of enhancements given in the
Environmental Statement or other output from the environmental
impact assessment have been delivered in the design alongside
those for environmental mitigation and compensation?
1.1.4 b)
36 pts
1.1.4 c)
12 pts
36
If No, score 0.
If >25% of promises delivered, score 9.
If >50%, score 18.
If >75%, score 27.
If >90%, score 36.
results of these environmental impacts and benefits assessments
have been included within relevant contract documentation?
12

Scope-out
Guidance
Question 1.1.4 a) is Mandatory. It is unlikely that Questions 1.1.4 b) and c) will ever be
scoped out but it is possible that an Environmental Statement may not contain any
promises of enhancements and produce no matters that need including in contract
documentation.
Many project teams in the UK and Ireland are required to undertake formal Environmental Impact
Assessments (EIAs) as part of the consents process. However, many projects are not, and the
distances beyond the boundaries of the project site within which impacts are assessed can vary
widely from one EIA to another.
Question
Guidance
It is vital to securing the best sustainability-driven project decisions that EIAs, whether statutorily
required or not, are undertaken within the most appropriate time and geographical boundaries.
This is to minimise the chances of significant adverse impact that occur remotely from the project
being ignored, and to maximise the chances of environmental enhancements associated with the
project being realisable.
For the transport sector, the UK Department of Transport has extensive guidance on the conduct
of transport studies, whether economic, social or environmental see www.dft.gov.uk/webtag/.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence of the analysis is likely to be in the form of an Environmental Statement (ES) or

Environmental Commentary prepared during development of the project, and then
submitted for the planning and consents processes. To gain full points for part a) it will be
necessary to demonstrate that the scoping and boundary setting for the assessments were
carefully set to maximise the chances of significant adverse impacts that occur remotely
from the project being included.
Evidence for part b) is likely to be in the form of design drawings and design details but
will also need to be linked to the ES or commentary, and demonstrate that the design
incorporates the promises included there.
10
CEEQUAL Ltd
1.1.5 (M) CLIMATE CHANGE ADAPTATION

Did the project strategy include consideration of the potential
effects of predicted climate change scenarios?
Scope-out
Guidance
Client
Design
Construct
20
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score 4 each for the following five aspects covered:
(i) Flood risk;
(ii) Sea-level rise;
(iii) Intensity of rainfall;
(iv) Drought;
(v) Temperature rise.
1.1.5 a)
(M)
20 pts
1.1.5 b)
40 pts
Has the consideration assessed in Question 1.1.5 a) led to the

implementation of appropriate adaptation strategies?
40
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score 8 for each of the aspects implemented.
Question 1.1.5 a) is Mandatory. Question 1.1.5 b) can be scoped out if the analysis used as
the answer to Question 1.1.5 a) shows that no adaptation is necessary.
It is increasingly clear that the potential effects of climate change are not going to be dealt with
only by mitigation of greenhouse gas emissions; adaptation is also going to be necessary. For
civil engineering projects to be sustainable long-term, whether infrastructure, other civil
engineering, landscaping or public realm, it is likely that adaptation will need to be a central theme
of design, both at the concept and detailed design stages, and for refurbishment and renewal
projects as well as for new works.
Question
Guidance
The UK Government published the UK Climate Change Risk Assessment (CCRA) in January
2012 (see www.defra.gov.uk/environment/climate/ and
www.defra.gov.uk/environment/climate/government/risk-assessment/), the first assessment of its
kind for the UK and the first in a 5-year cycle. Sector reports are available for, amongst others: the
built environment; business, industry and services; energy; floods and coastal erosion; transport;
and water.
The reports provide an evidence base, help us better understand the risks, and will inform
development of a National Adaptation Programme (see http://engage.defra.gov.uk/nap/) currently
under way.
Guidance is also available in Infrastructure, Engineering and Climate Change Adaptation
ensuring services in an uncertain future prepared and published by the Royal Academy of
Engineering and Institution of Civil Engineers and available at
www.raeng.org.uk/news/publications/list/reports/Engineering_the_future_2011.pdf.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence for part a) is likely to be in the form of an appropriate section of the Project
Strategy if written up in such a way, or in a separate climate change adaptation study
report for the project or equivalent.
Evidence for part b) is likely to be in the form of design drawings and design details but
will also need to be linked to the Project Strategy or climate change adaptation study
report and demonstrate that the design incorporates recommended adaptation measures.
CEEQUAL Ltd
11
1.1.6 (M) PROJECT RESOURCES STRATEGY

1.1.6 a)
5 pts
Client
Design
Construct
Did the project brief include instructions to consider how to balance

5
land use efficiency with other priorities?
Have the Client and/or the Designers prepared a project resources
strategy in line with the guidance below?
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score 4 each for the following five aspects:
(i) Energy;
(ii) Water;
(iii) Materials sourcing;
(iv) Reuse & recycling;
(v) Wastes management.
1.1.6 b)
(M)
20 pts
1.1.6 c)
25 pts
1.1.6 d)
9 pts
20
Is there evidence that the resources strategy for the project been 25
implemented in and significantly influenced the design?
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score 5 for each of the aspects implemented.
Is there evidence that resource efficiency objectives and (where
appropriate) benchmarks and/or targets have been included within
relevant contract documentation?

Question 1.1.6 a) can be scoped out if there are genuinely no new uses of land associated
with the project (for example an offshore wind farm that uses only existing on-land
facilities).
Question 1.1.6 b) is Mandatory.
Scope-out
Guidance
It is unlikely that Question 1.1.6 c) can ever be scoped out because in principle all projects
utilise a range of resources. However, it is accepted that there may be circumstances
where it would be inappropriate to influence the design in the way indicated.
It is also unlikely that Question 1.1.6 d) can ever be scoped out because in principle all
projects should be setting targets for the supply chain. However, it is accepted that there
may be circumstances where it would be inappropriate to embed benchmarking and targetsetting in the way indicated, for example on very short timescale projects.
A Project Resources Strategy is important to enable delivery of the performance-orientated
questions in Section 8. The materials element of such a strategy would be expected to be based
on a life-cycle analysis and the cradle-to-cradle principle but does not have to be generated that
way. It would be expected to cover but not be limited to:
Question
Guidance
the key materials and components to be incorporated in the project (by volume, value
and/or propensity to be wasted);
the remote impacts of extracting those materials from the planet and then processing
them for use or into components;
opportunities to improve the resource efficiency of the project;
the sourcing of energy supplies for operation of the works if relevant;
the use and management of other resources to be used for operation of the completed
works; and
sustainability considerations at the end of the useful life for example design for re-use
and recycling at end of life.
Examples of the remote impacts could be from mining of bulk materials or ores. Examples of the
resources used in operation of the completed works could include process chemicals in water and
wastewater treatment plants, salt and other chemicals for road or airport de-icing; and feedstock
fuels for power stations.
The EU Resource Efficiency Roadmap can be helpful in developing the materials elements of a
resource strategy - see http://ec.europa.eu/environment/resource_efficiency/index_en.htm.
12
CEEQUAL Ltd
Such a strategy is only of value if it is actively implemented in the design and construction so
Question 1.1.6 b) seeks evidence that that the strategy has been implemented at the design
stage, while Question 1.1.6 c) seeks evidence that the requirements of the strategy at have been
cascaded into the contract documentation for implementation during the construction stage. Both
these issues are then followed up through performance-orientated questions in Section 8.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a document entitled Project Resources Strategy with the attributes
indicated in the guidance, or could be a series of less-broad analyses that, taken together,
provide the high-level, strategic overview that can provide significant input to the project
concept and design.
The evidence must be in scale to the nature, location, context and size of the project. A
two-page summary report would be insufficient for a multi-million pound project, yet a 100page detailed analysis is very unlikely to be appropriate for projects in the region of 1M.
1.1.7 (M) CONTRIBUTION TO MORE-SUSTAINABLE LIVING
75 pts
Has the project team brought together and analysed the results of
the assessments covered in Questions 1.1.2 to 1.1.5 (economic,
social, environmental impacts & benefits, and climate change) to
assess whether, overall, the project outcome delivers for the
community(ies) it serves the ability to achieve more-sustainable
living?
Client
Design
Construct
75
If the project is judged to deliver ability to live more-sustainably,

score 75.
If judged to be neutral*, score 45.
If negative*, i.e. neither delivering ability to live more-sustainably
nor neutral, score 0.
Scope-out
Guidance

* See below for explanations of neutral and negative in the context of this question.
This question draws together the individual threads of the first six questions to prompt the project
Client and Designer to consider whether their project is not only performing well from a
sustainability viewpoint but is also moving the community(ies) that it serves towards or away from
more-sustainable living than before the project was created. In other words, is it a good project
from a sustainability perspective?
Although the decision of the team is not being assessed or scored here, it is important that their
decision is reported in the evidence.
Question
Guidance
Whilst it is difficult to be precise about what constitutes a project that positive contributes to moresustainable living, some broad examples can be constructive, even though the answer on a
specific project will require the synthesis of all the assessments undertaken. The following
guidance is therefore aimed at indicating (but not defining) what the terms in the question (deliver
ability to live more-sustainably, neutral and negative) can be taken to mean in the context of a
CEEQUAL Assessment.
CEEQUAL Ltd
A project that succeeds in delivering the ability to live more-sustainably is likely to deliver
positive economic benefits, significant social improvements, no significant adverse
environmental impacts and some limited environmental enhancements. A very positive
project could be one that succeeds very significantly on all three legs of the sustainability
triangle: very positive economic of commercial benefits, very significant social
improvements such as re-vitalising a run-down community, no significant adverse
environmental impacts and significant and widespread environmental enhancements.
For example, a new road that merely extends urban sprawl may be considered by many
to be moving society in the wrong direction, whilst a carefully designed and constructed
by-pass around an over-trafficked small town may be moving its community in the right
direction, enabling improved quality of life for the residents, increased activity for local
businesses because access to them is improved, alongside reduced journey times for
through travellers. A new or improved public transport system with very carefully
13
managed construction stages that minimise adverse impacts on neighbours during

construction may also be a positive project.
An extremely energy-efficient wastewater treatment works that is greatly improving the

quality of effluent to a river may readily be assessed as a positive project. On the other
hand, there have been question marks over some water treatment projects that seem to
be aimed at improving the quality of treated water that is already deemed to be potable
and not harmful to human health. Some consider such projects, with their associated and
often-high energy consumption and greenhouse gas emissions, as not worth the candle
they may be improving some aspects of human well-being but not helping us live
more-sustainably.
A neutral project in this context could be applied to a project on which positive impacts in
some areas are offset by negatives in other areas, but none of the adverse impacts are
classed as significant. It may be sustainable in the long term, but is not redressing any
past excessive adverse impacts.
A negative project could be one that, even if economically or commercially successful

and welcomed by some stakeholders in addition to the promoter, has significant adverse
environmental effects, perhaps remote from the site, and/or significant adverse social
impacts, also perhaps connected with remote impacts, such as in the extraction and
processing of raw materials.
Guidance is available at http://fidic.org/books/project-sustainability-management-
guidelines-2004.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence for part a) will need to demonstrate through reports of an analysis that the
various strands of assessments undertaken for the earlier questions have been brought
together and a rigorous judgement made about the whether the project succeeds in
delivering the ability to live more-sustainably (pathway contribution). The answer on
whether the project succeeds in delivering the ability to live more-sustainably and the
reasoning also need to be reported in the evidence.
Evidence for part b) may be in the same report but will need to demonstrate the exercise of
careful judgement on the extent to which the project succeeds in delivering the ability to
live more-sustainably: positive, neutral or negative.
1.1.8 (M) DELIVERY OF STRATEGIC ASSESSMENTS
28 pts
Is there evidence that the project team has taken active steps to
ensure that the results of the strategic assessments and decisions
have been delivered into the completed project?
Client
Design
Construct
28

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
The best strategies in the world are worth little if there are no active steps taken to put them into
practice. It is therefore vital to the success of a sustainability-driven project strategy that all team
members involved in the design and construction are aware of the strategy and its implications for
their role in the project. This will therefore involve making sure that the desired outcomes are
included in design briefs, designs and construction management plans and outcomes, and
therefore in briefings and project-specific training where appropriate.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence is likely to be in the form of design briefs, reports on the final design, and in
construction management plans and reports.
14
CEEQUAL Ltd
1.2
Overall strategy for construction
Since the greatest potential influence on the projects impacts both positive and negative is likely to arise
from decisions made early in the conception and design stages, it is vital that the results of the strategic
assessments and decisions are translated through to the construction stage, whether through the design itself
or through contractual requirements.
In addition, it is also important for a sustainability-driven strategy for the construction stage to be set alongside
implementation of the design, because it can also yield significant social and environmental as well as
economic benefits.
Choice of construction methodology to minimise nuisance to neighbours may bring great benefits in one
location, while choice to minimise construction time may be better in another. Securing high-volume materials
for the project from one source may bring major cost benefits, but increased adverse transport impacts, or vice
versa. Above-average use of recycled materials may mean increased levels of testing but significant reductions
in carbon footprint.
As with design, early rigorous and sustainability-driven thinking on the management strategy for the
construction stage may cost a little more in planning and preparation time but it too is extremely likely to pay
significant dividends for the project overall, whether from reduced construction costs, minimised or eliminated
adverse environmental effects, minimised nuisance effects on neighbours, or reduced objections to the project.
The challenge, again as with design, is to identify and then deliver the best balance between economic, social
and environmental aspects of the construction process, with minimised or eliminated adverse effects and
maximised uptake of positive opportunities.
1.2.1 (M) CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT STRATEGY
15 pts
Is there evidence that the project team has actively adopted a

sustainability-driven approach to the development of the
construction management strategy and plan for the project?
Client
Design
Construct

Scope-out
Guidance

The incorporation of sustainability-driven principles for a construction management strategy
requires the consideration of a number of different but inter-related issues. These can include:
effects of the construction processes on the local environment and neighbours;
materials selection and sourcing;
transport of people and physical resources;
wider impacts on the community locally or regionally, depending on the projects
geographic scale and timescale; and
the economic impacts of a project on the local and/or regional community.
Question
Guidance
Development of the strategy should start during the development of the project and be
incorporated into the outline Construction Sustainability (or Environmental) Management Plan that
should be handed over by the Client and Designer to the chosen Contractor for further
development.
A number of these issues are covered in more detail by other questions in Section 1 and in other
sections within CEEQUAL. This question is looking for whether there has been an overarching
approach within the project team to consider and adopt appropriately the broader concepts of
sustainability and sustainable development in planning the execution of the construction stage.
Guidance on these matters is in the outputs of the Strategic Forum for Construction see
www.strategicforum.org.uk, and current UK Government policies and action plans on sustainable
construction, which can be found at www.bis.gov.uk/policies/business-sectors/construction. The
Royal Academy of Engineerings guide Engineering for Sustainable Development: Guiding
principles (2005) also has useful guidance on implementation of sustainability principles on
projects, and is downloadable from the Academys website, at
www.raeng.org.uk/education/vps/pdf/Engineering_for_Sustainable_Development.pdf.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence is likely to be the whole construction plan or specific parts of it, in meeting
records, and/or a sustainability assessment or appraisal report on the construction stage.
CEEQUAL Ltd
15
1.2.2 (M) CONSTRUCTION RESOURCES STRATEGY
1.2.2 a)
(M)
12 pts
Client
Has the construction team developed their own resources strategy

for the construction stage of the project, or reviewed and refined
the strategy developed by the Client and Designers. Is there
evidence that the strategy covers the following:
the key materials and components to be incorporated in
the project;
the remote impacts of winning those materials from the
planet;
the sourcing of energy supplies for the construction stage;
and the use and management of other resources?
Design
Construct
12
If No, score 0. If Yes, score as indicated if all four aspects covered.

To what extent have the actions (by number) identified in the
construction stage resources strategy been implemented?
1.2.2 b)
(M)
24 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
24
If No, score 0.
If >25%, score 6.
If >50%, score 12.
If >75%, score 18.
If >90%, score 24.
None Questions are Mandatory.
This question is seeking for the Contractor to have a strategy in place, including for their supply
chain.
Question
Guidance
Guidance on improving the resource efficiency of construction and on using procurement to set
requirements for constructors is available from WRAP. This guidance sets the requirement for the
supply chain to set corporate level commitments to improving resource efficiency. This
commitment is then embedded into contract or sub-contract documentation and construction
processes in line with the sustainability-driven strategy for the project. All actions, targets or
benchmarks, and actual performance should be captured within a Resource Management Plan
and Record (or similar) for the project.
Other approaches to meeting these requirements would include the use of specific resource
efficiency metrics (such as materials use, wastage or embodied carbon) together with an action
plan that sets out clear responsibilities for specific parties in improving resource efficiency. There
should be a contractual requirement to develop and/or implement such an action plan.
Finally, it should be noted that, since sustainability is about balancing the environmental, social
and economic aspects of a project, this means that the best (sustainability-driven) option for a
project does not necessarily mean it will be the best environmental option.
Evidence will be in the reports of the assessments and in the Construction Management
Plan or equivalent.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should involve demonstration of how the Clients commitment and resources
strategy (assessed under Question 1.1.6) has been addressed in the planning and
preparation for the construction stage for example, evidence of a Resource Management
Plan, a resources section of a Construction Management Plan, or similar. Such documents
should be detailing both predicted and actual performance against benchmarks for metrics
such as energy consumption, water use, materials consumption, and waste minimisation.
Simply specifying that a practitioner is committed but without any further evidence is
insufficient for achieving the points for this question.
16
CEEQUAL Ltd
1.2.3 (M) SOCIAL IMPACTS AND BENEFITS DURING CONSTRUCTION

1.2.3 a)
(M)
13 pts
Client
Design
Has the Construction Team undertaken a social impacts and

benefits assessment of the construction stage of the project and
used the results in the development of the Construction
Management Plan?
Construct
13

1.2.3 b)
(M)
24 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Have the social aspects of the Construction Management Plan

been implemented?
24

This question is seeking for the Contractor to have actively assessed in advance all of the effects
on neighbours to the works and the local community, and compare them to the background
conditions. The assessments need to include those generated by their supply chain, and planned
the works accordingly. Issues that need to be addressed in such an assessment include but are
not necessarily limited to:
nuisances such as noise, dust, odour, light pollution and blown waste;
impacts on traffic and available road space from delivery of materials and components,
collection of wastes, and staff travel;
visual impact of the site and its boundary fencing;
vibration effects on neighbouring buildings;
effects on nearby historic assets;
potential increase in flood risk to others arising from the construction stage, especially of
temporary works;
respect shown to neighbours and passers-by by the staff and workforce;
opportunities for work on the project by local people.
Guidance on these issues is available in the appropriate parts of Sections 2 to 9 of this Manual.
Evidence
Guidance
Plan or equivalent.
1.2.4 (M) ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS DURING CONSTRUCTION
1.2.4 a)
(M)
13 pts
Has the Construction Team undertaken an environmental impacts

assessment of the construction stage of the project and used the
results to strengthen where practicable the scope and coverage of
the Construction Management Plan compared to the normal Plan
used before?
Client
Design
Construct
13

1.2.4 b)
(M)
24 pts
Have the environmental aspects of the Construction Management

Plan been implemented?
24
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
This question is seeking for the Contractor to have actively assessed in advance the
environmental aspects and impacts of the works including those generated by their supply chain,
and planned the works accordingly. Issues that need to be addressed in such an assessment
include but are not necessarily limited to:
impacts of the production of materials used in the works;
minimising the use of any hazardous materials to be used in the construction stage;
minimising water use during construction (consistent with other requirements such as
dust control);
energy consumption and carbon emissions during the construction stage;
pollution prevention, especially of any water bodies near or under the site;
CEEQUAL Ltd
17
impacts on flora and fauna;

dealing with any contaminated soils and/or other materials and components on the site;
dealing with excavation arisings and wastes from the works.
Guidance on these issues is available in the appropriate parts of Sections 2 to 9 of this Manual.
Evidence
Guidance
18
Plan or equivalent.
CEEQUAL Ltd
2.
Section 2: Project Management
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
This section considers how sustainability issues are being incorporated into the overall management of the
project. It covers a number of issues ranging from environmental management systems and training through to
how the procurement processes consider environmental and social performance. It is important to recognise
the implications of CEEQUAL assessing what is being built and how it is built; references to sustainability and
social issues throughout the Manual refer to the social issues that arise from developing, designing and
constructing the project, rather than the broader issues of social acceptability of the project.
2.1
Basic principles
An environmental management system (EMS) is a mechanism for managing the environmental impacts of a
business, development project or operational process. Its complexity and scope are dependent upon:
the extent of environmental risk and opportunity associated with the situation the system is used to
manage; and
its importance to the organisation with responsibility for that risk or opportunity.
Experience shows that if environmental management and social issues are integrated into the overall project
management philosophy and are planned into the project, then enhanced environmental and social
performance is likely to be achieved. The questions in Section 2 are therefore focussed on the key
environmental and social issues that need to be considered in the project management process to assist in
delivering this high performance. There will appear to be some overlap between evidence in this section and in
the other sections of the CEEQUAL Assessment, but this is intentional and not double-scoring any actions.
The differentiation in Section 2 is that CEEQUAL is looking for evidence that demonstrates that sustainability
issues are fully embedded into the project management approach. This does not necessarily need technical
evidence that the Assessor needs to produce in the other sections of the Assessment.
2.1.1 (M) ENVIRONMENTAL & SOCIAL ASPECTS ASSESSMENT

20 pts
Was there a documented commitment to consider and assess the

environmental and social aspects of the project?
Client
10
Design
Construct
If No, score 0. If Yes, score as indicated for each stage.

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
It is considered vital for the success of effective management of the environmental and social
aspects of a project for the commitment to their consideration, assessment and delivery is not
only made by the senior management of each major party to the project but also written down so
that it can be readily communicated to project team members and stakeholders.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include a written commitment from the Projects Directors, a Project
Environmental Policy Statement, a Project Sustainability Statement, and/or objectives &
targets. However, a general Company Environmental Policy Statement is not sufficient,
unless it includes a specific commitment to consider and assess environmental and social
aspects for every project. Additionally, specifying that a project has applied for a
CEEQUAL Award is not considered appropriate evidence.
2.1.2 (M) CO-ORDINATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL & SOCIAL ASPECTS
30 pts
Is there clear evidence that a member of the project team was

appointed as responsible for co-ordinating the management of the
environmental and social aspects of the project and was aware of
the duties and responsibilities involved?
Client
10
Design
10
Construct
10

Scope-out
Guidance
CEEQUAL Ltd
19
Question
Guidance
Every project, irrespective of size, should have someone designated as being responsible for its
environmental and social aspects. On smaller projects, a member of the project team may be
responsible for this along with their other duties. On larger-scale projects, it is likely to be a
dedicated Sustainability or Environmental Manager or Coordinator. On partnership projects, it
may be the same person at each stage.
For the score to be awarded detailed duties and responsibilities in relation to the project must
have been set out on appointment.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be: a formal note of the appointment; records of meetings where the role is
clearly set out; reports from the identified person to the project team; or an organogram or
similar identifying roles and responsibilities within the project team and/or project
management structure.
2.1.3 (M) IDENTIFICATION AND PRIORITISATION OF IMPACTS

Have the environmental risks, impacts and opportunities for
environmental enhancements, and the associated social issues,
been:
Client
25
Design
Construct
25
(i) identified and clearly recorded for each stage, and

(ii) prioritised according to significance?
50 pts
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score 15 points for (i), and 10 points for (ii).
Scope-out
Guidance

All adverse environmental risks and impacts of the project and the associated social issues
should be identified, as well as positive impacts and opportunities for environmental and social
improvements resulting from the project.
Question
Guidance
The significance of adverse impacts is assessed by a combination of the potential severity and
the likelihood of the impact occurring if no action is taken to avoid it. The result of this assessment
then enables prioritisation of risks and impacts according to significance, which assists in setting
the priorities for mitigation measures.
The significance of positive impacts and opportunities is similarly assessed according to the
expected environmental benefit and the likelihood of their occurring or being able to be carried out
as part of the project. This will then guide decisions on which of the opportunities the project team
should concentrate.
Evidence
Guidance
2.2
Evidence could be a report on the impact and opportunity assessments, minutes of project
team meetings at which the process was undertaken, or the charts prepared after such
discussions.
Evidence for the score in the combined Client and Design columns in a Whole Team Award
or Client & Design Assessment must demonstrate that this work has been undertaken or
specified by the Client and the outcomes accepted by them.
Sustainability management
The integrated management of the environmental, social and economic aspects of a project is central to the
delivery of improved sustainability. In many respects, best practice in the management of design and
construction has always sought to deliver such integration, but common practice in the late 20th Century often
fell short of this ideal. Environmental pressures from wider society, and legislation driven by such concerns, led
to the introduction of formal Environmental Management Systems (EMSs). In many organisations, they have
been steadily extended to cover management of the effects of projects on neighbours and other social issues.
With the more-recent drive for a sustainability-based approach, design and construction management is
increasingly seeking and demanding a genuinely integrated approach where, within any regulatory regime that
may relate to the issues being managed, the most appropriate balanced solution to design and construction
challenges are identified and implemented.
20
CEEQUAL Ltd
The best practice aim is therefore to establish project management processes that seek to deliver:
project designs that sit in harmony with their surroundings (or, if a redevelopment project, enhance
those surroundings);
societal benefits for the communities into which projects are introduced, whilst at the same time
protecting and enhancing the environment; and
all of these in an economically beneficial manner (which could be for acceptable levels of profit in
commercial promoters, or acceptable cost on publically financed projects).
The questions in this sub-section and in other sub-sections of Project Management prompt and reward actions
aimed at these goals.
2.2.1 (M) SUSTAINABILITY MANAGEMENT MECHANISMS
25 pts
Have appropriate mechanisms been put in place to manage the

projects environmental and social risks, impacts and
opportunities?
Client
Design
10
Construct
10

Scope-out
Guidance

It should be stressed that appropriate mechanisms does not automatically mean that a full
ISO14001-compliant and certified EMS is required. This is now almost certainly always
appropriate for larger or complex projects, but for smaller projects, the mechanisms could be as
simple as minutes of meetings or communication via site memorandums. The key thing to
demonstrate here is that there is a mechanism by which the key actions to be taken are
documented along with the responsibilities for undertaking them.
At design stage, appropriate mechanisms could be in the form of a Project Environmental
Management Plan (PEMP) or Action Plan with active monitoring of progress against that Plan.
However, the fact that an EIA was undertaken for the project is not regarded as evidence that
mechanisms for the management of issues identified in such a study are being operated
effectively and appropriately.
Question
Guidance
At construction stage, appropriate mechanisms could be in the form of a SEMP or an Integrated

Site Management Plan that includes coverage and management of environmental and social
issues again with active monitoring of progress against that Plan. Such a plan would cover the
management of all significant environmental and social aspects of the construction process and
would be specifically drawn up for the relevant site and project. It should address issues such as
minimising nuisance to neighbours, the management of sub-contractors and suppliers
environmental performance, and training requirements. It should also include procedures for
monitoring its implementation, emergency response plans, and operational control procedures (for
example, for waste disposal and spill prevention).
It is very important that Designers positively seek information on, and get copies of, agreements,
commitments and undertakings made during the consents process and integrate their contents
into the design process. Equally, Contractors need to secure and act on similar information from
the consents and design processes that relate to the construction stage to ensure that
commitments made earlier in the project are adhered to and that inappropriate actions are
avoided.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be procedures, flowcharts, checklists and/or documented control

measures, and would form part of an EMS if there were one in place. However, an EMS is
not a prerequisite and, in smaller companies or projects, evidence could be minutes of
meetings at which these issues, and the mechanisms to be used, are discussed and
agreed. Appropriate mechanisms could have been put in place without the existence of a
full EMS. However, they do need to be documented in some form and should clearly state
the steps to be taken and any roles and responsibilities to be assumed. They also need to
match the level of complexity of environmental issues relevant to the project.
The output from an environmental impact assessment that included discussion of how the
projects environmental issues, impacts and opportunities are to be managed would not be
sufficient evidence to gain the points for this question. Evidence is required that such EIA
outputs have been translated into action.
CEEQUAL Ltd
21
2.2.2 (M) IMPLEMENTATION OF MECHANISMS

25 pts
Client
Have regular* checks been made to ensure that these mechanisms

5
have been implemented?
Design
10
Construct
10

Scope-out
Guidance

*Interpretation of regular depends on the size of the project and, in particular, the length of time it
is predicted to take. On the majority of projects, a review on a three-monthly basis would be
acceptable, but this should be more frequent on projects or project phases of 6 months or less. If
the review period is longer, and this is still considered acceptable, then it should be justified. In
any case, it is essential that the extent of the reviews should be appropriate to the environmental
risks and scale of the project.
Question
Guidance
On longer-duration and/or larger projects these checks are likely to include formal internal
environmental audits. However, these may not be appropriate on smaller or shorter duration
projects.
The important thing to demonstrate for this question is that some form of checking has taken
place to ensure the mechanisms referred to in Question 2.2.1 have been implemented and are
effective. On smaller projects, this could, for instance, simply be records of reviews in weekly
meeting minutes.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be site review meeting minutes, site inspections, checklists, or audit
reports.
2.2.3 (M) SUCCESS OF THE MECHANISMS
25 pts
Have the results (success or otherwise) of the implementation of

the environment and social aspects management mechanisms
been assessed?
Client
Design
10
Construct
10

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
As opposed to the regular checks of implementation referred to in Question 2.2.2, this question
asks about the review of the results of implementation, which implies a further step and a moreproactive review, looking at the outcome of the implemented mechanisms, not just whether they
have been undertaken.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include actions shown as closed off in minutes, close-out of audit nonconformance reports, or other evidence demonstrating completion of actions arising from
site inspections as well as evidence that a review that took place routinely as opposed to
being only as a result of a check that has taken place in Question 2.2.2.
For instance, a standing item in project progress meetings or reports, which routinely
review environmental and social performance and the success of control mechanisms
established, would be acceptable. Evidence could also include the achievement of
appropriate project targets set for environmental and social performance.
2.2.4 (M) SUSTAINABILITY TRAINING
39 pts
Has there been a programme of training on environmental and

social issues relevant to the project delivered at an appropriate
level for those engaged in the project?
Client
13
Design
13
Construct
13

Scope-out
Guidance
22
CEEQUAL Ltd
Question
Guidance
Project-specific environmental training should at a minimum cover the significant environmental

impacts and opportunities identified (as covered by Question 2.1.3), as well as instructions on
how to deal with them. It can also include the issues of Site Waste Management Plans, waste
reduction, material resource efficiency, energy performance over the whole life of the completed
works, and water consumption minimisation. These issues can be dealt with in a wide range of
training sessions, including formal courses for project team members, sessions within project
team meetings, or via site inductions and toolbox talks. Resources such as the CIRIAs
Environmental good practice on site (C692, 2010) and its associated pocket book (C715, 2012)
provide useful information to support site environmental management. Records of these should
be available.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include records of site inductions or toolbox talks, more-formal training
workshops for the project, briefings or other training on specific issues for the project
(such as on otter holt construction or use of new equipment), plus workshops with the
Client, Designer and project team members to review and establish environmental risk.
2.2.5 (M) PRINCIPLES OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

Is there evidence that the project team actively delivered the
sustainable-development-based Project Strategy addressed in
Section 1?
46 pts
Client
26
Design
15
Construct
Or, if no such strategy was developed:

Is there evidence that the project team actively considered the
principles of sustainable development in the planning, design and
construction of the project?
Scope-out
Guidance

Section 1 assesses how the project team has related their project to the wider sustainability
agenda surrounding civil engineering and infrastructure projects and their contribution to
sustainable development.
If Section 1 has been included in the CEEQUAL Assessment, then this question focuses on
delivery of the sustainable development principles adopted in the Project Strategy through the
project management processes used on the project.
If Section 1 has not been included in the CEEQUAL Assessment or Question 1.1.1 has scored 0,
then the assessment of this question should address the alternative question above.
Question
Guidance
The incorporation of sustainable development principles within a project requires the

consideration of a number of different issues. These can include effects of the project on the local
environment, impacts on society and the economic impacts of a project on the local community,
both during the construction of the project and its subsequent operation and eventual
decommissioning. A number of these issues are covered in more detail by other questions within
CEEQUAL, so what this question is looking for is whether there is an overarching objective within
the project team to consider the broader concepts of sustainable development within the project
decision-making.
Guidance on these matters is available in the Royal Academy of Engineerings guide Engineering
for Sustainable Development: Guiding principles (2005) downloadable from the Academys
website
http://www.raeng.org.uk/education/vps/pdf/Engineering_for_Sustainable_Development.pdf.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a sustainable development policy that cascades into a project

sustainability framework for the project. Further evidence that this has received active
consideration could include design team meeting records, or a sustainability assessment
or appraisal report.
CEEQUAL Ltd
23
2.3
Contractual and procurement processes
The Client is a key enabler in setting and achieving high environmental and social standards in civil
engineering, infrastructure, landscaping or public realm projects. The Client owns its projects and is responsible
for their direct and indirect impacts, which in the case of infrastructure projects can be far-reaching. There are
requirements for EIAs and environmental surveys at the outset of major projects, but rigorous attempts to
ensure that these are fully cascaded down the supply chain, beyond the need to satisfy regulations, are
regrettably not widely practised. Approaches to procurement, costing, selection criteria, contractual agreements
and team working are key factors in the Clients environmental management role and provide a measure of
EMS quality at this stage.
Contract and procurement processes play a very influential role in:
determining the importance of environmental and social issues within the project team;
how people will be motivated to minimise adverse environmental and social impacts and maximise
positive ones; and
how people will be motivated to maintain quality standards throughout the project and to play a role in
enhancing standards as the project proceeds.
Simply put, the greater the equity share or benefit people have throughout the supply chain, the more motivated
they will be to consider the risks and opportunities associated with the environmental and social impacts of the
project.
No standard published contracts are referred to in this section because none is known to include standard
clauses on dealing with environmental and social issues in the same way that most cover health & safety
issues. However, detailed requirements on environmental and social matters, specifications, and on Designer
and/or Contractor performance, are now regularly included in other contract documentation by individual clients,
and questions can be asked about the underpinning principles and intentions of the contract and procurement
process, such as:
Do they seek to increase partnership and ownership throughout the process by aiming to share both
risks and rewards?
Do they seek to extend the timescale over which parties are responsible for the outcomes of the project
and over which success is to be measured?
Other key questions include the following:
Is there evidence of environmental and social performance criteria being used in the selection of
Designers, Contractors and operators?
Is there provision for environmental and social issues to be considered throughout the supply chain?
What targets, measures and checks are put in place to demonstrate how environmental and social
criteria have been used in the selection?
To what extent are environmental and social issues included in the project reporting and review
process?
The CIRIA Guide to sustainable procurement in construction (C695) provides further information on this subject.
2.3.1 (M) PROJECT TEAM COMMUNICATIONS
25 pts
Have all those directly engaged in the project been informed of the
significant environmental impacts and opportunities, and
associated social issues,* of their part and/or stage of the project?
Client
Design
10
Construct
10

Scope-out
Guidance

* Assessment of impacts and opportunities (see Question 2.1.3) would have to have been carried
out to be able to score on this question.
Question
Guidance
This would cover the outcome of any EIA or any similar assessment undertaken, and can be
relayed via contract documents and invitations to bid, project environmental management plans,
method statements, start-up and progress meetings, or work instructions.
All those directly engaged in the project includes project management, design team, Contractors
and sub-contractors, and anyone else actively engaged, but not extractive and/or factory or office
24
CEEQUAL Ltd
sites of suppliers of materials or services.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence for the Client could include communication of environmental and social impacts
and opportunities within tender documents or specifications. For the Designer, this could
include how they have briefed their team on the environmental and social issues that
require consideration and/or provision of information in the design drawings, risk register.
For the Contractor, it could include the incorporation of environmental mitigation actions
in method statements, toolbox talks or other site briefings or inductions communicating
the requirements of the SEMP, information posted via site information boards or similar.
For any stage, it could also include more project workshops, such as on value
management and value engineering, that includes consideration of the environmental and
social impacts and opportunities on the project.
2.3.2
SELECTION PROCESS FOR DESIGNERS & CONTRACTORS
45 pts
Did the selection process for:

(i) the principal Designer
(ii) the main Contractor
(iii) the key sub-contractor(s)
Client
Design
30
Construct
15
include past environmental and social performance as one of the

evaluation criteria?
If No, score 0. If Yes, score 15 for each of (i)*, (ii) and (iii).
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out only for a Design Award where the Designer had no input to the Contractor
selection process.
Question
Guidance
* Note that in situations where the Client requires the Contractor to appoint the principal Designer
it is acceptable for the Contractor to score 15 points here.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include supplier appraisals, quality submissions information on

environmental and social issues during tender stage.
ENVIRONMENTAL AND SOCIAL PERFORMANCE IN
2.3.3 (M) CONTRACTS
25 pts
Is there evidence that the contract requirements for the Designers

and Contractors expressly include:
achievement of specified environmental and social
performance; and
a requirement to monitor and report on them during the
course of the contract?
Client
Design
Construct
25

Scope-out
Guidance

It is well known that different forms of contract can significantly influence the behaviour of the
contracting parties, especially to those issues that are implied as being necessary rather than
expressly stated. What is being sought here is that environmental and social performance
requirements are expressly stated so that there is no doubt as to those requirements and the
Designers and Contractors are properly resourced to deliver them.
Question
Guidance
Social performance could relate to a wide variety of issues but some generic examples could
include:
CEEQUAL Ltd
levels of engagement with the local community on consultation issues as specified in

Section 3;
engagement with local schools to raise awareness of civil engineering;
contribution to the local economy, for instance through use of local labour on the project;
enhancement to community facilities as part of the contract;
requiring express commitments to minimising nuisance to neighbours within the
constraints of the necessary construction processes.
25
Note that this question requires only evidence that the Client is specifying environmental and
social performance issues in contract requirements. Opportunities for the Designer and Contractor
to score for their own setting of targets is covered in Question 2.4.4. Actual monitoring and
reporting mechanisms are also covered in Question 2.4.4. Achievement is covered in other
sections of the Assessment.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include output from any contract strategy meetings or reports that show
consideration of environmental and social issues as a factor in the choice of procurement
method. Evidence could also include key environmental and social performance targets
within contract and reporting requirements
Simply specifying that a project has applied for a CEEQUAL Award, or that a specific
Award grade is achieved, is not considered appropriate evidence.
2.3.4
DELIVERING RESOURCE EFFICIENCY

Has the resource efficiency strategy sought in Section 1 been
implemented?
Client
Design
Construct
OR
If no such strategy has been developed:
21 pts
Is there evidence that steps have been taken identify and

implement opportunities to improve the resource efficiency of the
project?
and
Are resource efficiency objectives and (where appropriate)
benchmarks and/or targets included within relevant contract
documentation?
Scope-out
Guidance
No specific guidance. The decision by the Assessor and Verifier on whether to scope out
this question will depend on the nature, scale, location, context and resource content, of
the project.
Guidance on improving the resource efficiency of construction and on using procurement to set
requirements for Designers and constructors is available from WRAP. This guidance sets the
requirement for Clients and their suppliers to set a corporate level commitment to improving
resource efficiency.
Question
Guidance
This commitment is then embedded into contract documentation and project processes in line
with the sustainability brief for the project. All actions, targets or benchmarks, and actual
performance, should be captured within a Resource Management Plan (or similar) for the project.
Other approaches to meeting these requirements would include the use of specific resource
efficiency metrics (such as materials use, wastage, and embodied carbon) together with an action
plan that sets out clear responsibilities for specific parties in improving resource efficiency. There
should be a contractual requirement to develop and/or implement such an action plan. Refer to
WRAPs website: http://www.wrap.org.uk/category/sector/construction.
Evidence should involve demonstration of how the commitment has been adopted and
how this has been addressed (such as evidence of a Resource Management Plan or similar
document detailing both predicted and actual performance against benchmarks for metrics
such as energy consumption, water use, materials consumption).
Evidence
Guidance
Additional evidence could be copies of the procurement documentation and contracts

showing these requirements have been cascaded throughout the supply chain and
adopted in the project.
Simply specifying that a practitioner is committed but without any further evidence is
insufficient to score the points for this question.
26
CEEQUAL Ltd
2.4
Delivering performance on environmental and social aspects
Most of the following seven sections in this Manual deal with the performance delivery on specific
environmental and/or social aspects of the project. Therefore, this section focuses on the basic systems,
mechanisms and procedures that can be implemented to ensure that environmental and social performance is
given a high priority in the project. Having the appropriate plans and procedures in place is considered as
evidence for the intention and the commitment to deliver high environmental performance. Whether the actual
steps to achieve this have subsequently been taken will then be assessed in the other sections of the Manual.
Planning for lifetime operations
The initial capital cost of a project is always important, but it can lead to problems both financially and
environmentally if it is the only consideration in the design process. It is important therefore to consider the
future costs of maintenance and repair of the built works, as well as the first cost. This applies in both financial
and environmental terms. A CEEQUAL Assessment is therefore looking for evidence that the project has been
designed with this in mind.
Choice of construction process
The construction process, including issues such as fabrication on- or off-site, use of modular construction, and
minimisation of temporary works, can have a significant influence on the overall environmental and social
performance of a project. By having systems in place that examine the potential environmental and social
impacts of alternative means of construction, the ability to select the best option for the environment, the project
and its neighbours will be maximised. (Most of these detailed measures are dealt with under the individual issue
headings.)
Construction processes use many different pieces of equipment and plant, and import onto a site all manner of
substances that potentially could pollute the environment and cause harm to human health. Minimising
emissions and pollution from these is an essential part of good construction practice and in many places is
governed by legislation and regulation.
2.4.1 (M) WHOLE-LIFE APPROACH

35 pts
Is there clear evidence that the Client and the design team have
adopted a whole-life approach to design of the project?
Client
10
Design
Construct
25

Scope-out
Guidance

For instance, has a whole-life-costing exercise been carried out?
Question
Guidance
Note: The terminology surrounding 'Whole-Life Costing', 'Life-Cycle Costing', 'Life-Cycle Analysis',
Whole-Life Environmental Assessment and 'Full-Life Costing' can be confusing. However, the
important feature of all of them is that impacts at different stages must be accounted for, right
through to the end of the useful life of the works or facilities, and including the indirect effects such
as those associated with winning raw materials and manufacture of components. It is important in
this instance to recognise that, in the context of CEEQUAL, what is being looked for is
consideration of the environmental costs and benefits of the project from inception through design
and construction, to the operational and decommissioning phases. The whole-life exercise should
also therefore consider indirect operational issues such as nuisance and natural environment
enhancement.
The principles of Life-Cycle Costing for construction are set out in the International Standard BS
ISO 15686-5:2008 Buildings and constructed assets. Service life planning. Life-cycle costing. The
UK Supplement to this standard is PD 15686-5:2008 Standardized method for life-cycle costing
for construction procurement: A supplement to BS ISO 15686-5, available from the British
Standards Institution and the Royal Institute of Chartered Surveyors' Building Cost Information
Service. It provides comprehensive advice on how to undertake life-cycle costing for the UK
construction industry.
Having carried out a study, additional points may follow from appropriate design to allow for
efficient or reduced levels of maintenance, and for ease of deconstruction and recycling at the end
of life. These aspects are assessed in Section 8: Physical Resources Use and Management.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence will need to be in the form of a report from the process.
CEEQUAL Ltd
27
2.4.2 (M) WHOLE LIFE: CLIMATE CHANGE ADAPTATION
25 pts
Client
Did the whole-life approach include consideration of the potential

effects of predicted climate change scenarios, leading to
appropriate adaptation strategies?
Design
Construct
25

Scope-out
Guidance

Apart from trying to reduce the release of CO2 and other greenhouse gases into the atmosphere,
to avert the predicted changes in climate, all new civil engineering or public realm projects should
be designed in such a way that the potential impacts of climate change can be alleviated or, at a
minimum, are not worsened, and/or that the project can be adapted to cope with predicted
changes in climate.
Question
Guidance
This might, for example, include very flexible energy and internal environment management
systems that will cope easily with significant changes in outside temperatures, systems designed
to cope with heavier and more-frequent storms, very high wind speeds, higher rainfall in winter
and longer periods of drought in summer, and precautions against flooding on site and
downstream, as well as emissions-reduction facilities.
For road projects, this needs to be more than just the standard 20% contingency for additional
run-off. For instance, other considerations could include impact of more-extreme temperatures on
pavements or structures.
More guidance on the potential impacts of climate change is available from the UKCIP
(www.ukcip.org.uk). The Environment Agency has also set up an Adapting to Climate Change
Programme see www.environment-agency.gov.uk/research/132323.aspx.
Note that this question raises separate issues to the specific consideration of flood risk covered by
Question 4.3.1.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be any reference to reports of studies undertaken by or on behalf of the

design team, or notes of project team meetings to consider the issue.
2.4.3 (M) WHOLE LIFE: CONSTRUCTION METHODS & MATERIALS

Is there evidence that the design team and/or construction teams
have addressed the environmental and social implications of
different construction methods and materials for the project that will
improve its whole-life performance?
20 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Client
Design
10
Construct
10
If No, score 0.
If the Designer can demonstrate delivery on their aspects of this
issue, score 10.
If the Contractor can demonstrate delivery on their aspects of this
issue, score 10.
WRAPs Designing out Waste resources are based on five key Designing out Waste principles
and employ structured approaches to identify, investigate and implement design solutions that
achieve more-efficient use of resources and reduce waste. These approaches are applied at the
design stage to maximise opportunities and can be included as part of the Value Management
process on larger projects. More information can be found on WRAPs website:
http://www.wrap.org.uk/construction/tools_and_guidance/.
Whilst it must be accepted that the greatest influence on whole-life environmental impact of a
project is the design, the processes adopted to construct a civil engineering project can
nevertheless significantly influence its overall environmental impact, especially when the
completed works do not involve significant resource consumption or wastage, such as a flood
defence bank.
Key issues include choice of processes and materials, pollution prevention measures, the choice
28
CEEQUAL Ltd
of equipment, the use of information technology (IT) and the culture and attitude adopted by an
organisation and its workforce. Decisions taken by the Contractor prior to work starting, regarding
their overall approach to the project, and a commitment to ensure that environmental and social
impacts are considered for every aspect of the work, will be essential in minimising the
environmental and social effects of the construction process.
In addition to their responsibility for ensuring their site activities are well managed, there is the
added role of managing variations in the contract and assessing them for reaching the necessary
environmental and social standards set by the Client. In this case, the Contractor is responsible
for both direct and indirect environmental and social impacts.
Note that the evidence here may be the same as for Question 2.1.3 but this is quite
acceptable.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence from Designers could include value-engineering reports, agreement of

alternative methods within management plans (such as a Project Environmental
Management Plan or equivalent), design change notes, and letters to the design team.
Outputs from applying WRAPs Designing out Waste resources, such as workshop
reports, specific design solutions and quantifiable material or waste savings would also be
appropriate.
Evidence from Contractors could include value-engineering reports, agreement of
alternative methods within management plans (such as a Site Environmental Management
Plan, Site Waste Management Plan or equivalent) and/or outputs from applying WRAPs
guidance (or equivalent) such as quantifiable material or waste savings.
2.4.4 (M) SUSTAINABILITY TARGETS FOR CONSTRUCTION

Have specific targets* been set during the concept and design
process for the environmental and social performance of the
project during construction?
2.4.4 a)
(M)
16 pts
Client
Design
Construct
AND
Is progress towards them monitored, reported and shared with the
staff and workforce at construction stage?
If no targets set or not monitored, score 0.
If targets set but no formal monitoring in place, score 8.
If progress monitored, reported and shared at the construction
stage, score additional 8.
2.4.4 b)
16 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Have relevant key environmental objectives and performance

targets been set for key sub-contractors and are they monitored
against performance?
16
If no targets set, score 0.

If targets set but no formal monitoring in place, score 8.
If targets set and progress monitored, reported and shared with the
staff, score 16.
Question 2.4.4 a) is Mandatory. There may be circumstances where it is appropriate to
scope out Question 2.4.4 b), for example if there are no sub-contractors involved.
* Targets should be quantifiable and where possible refer to timescales (SMART Targets =
Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Repeatable or Realistic, within a Timeframe).
Question
Guidance
Best practice suggests that environmental and social performance is highest if the Client is
involved in setting the requirements for the contract. However, if the Client does not specify this
then there are still opportunities for the Designer to influence what happens during the
construction stage.
It should be noted that the Client requirement is covered in Question 2.1.3. If this has been scored
then this question is about evidencing that the contract requirements have been translated into
practice on the project and communicated. If Question 2.1.3 has not been scored, then evidence
for this question also needs to demonstrate that appropriate targets are being set in relation to the
significant aspects identified in Question 2.1.3.
CEEQUAL Ltd
29
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include the setting of targets for achieving or exceeding target levels (such
as water quality targets) and/or specifying targets for completion of work elements to
avoid closed seasons (such as nesting birds). Whatever targets are set, evidence must
also be provided to demonstrate that they were regularly monitored for the points to be
gained.
Evidence for Question 2.4.4 b) could include inspection of sub-contractors and continued
good performance, toolbox talks or actual measures such as waste produced or number of
environmental incidents.
2.4.5
SUSTAINABILITY TARGETS FOR OPERATION

Have specific targets* been set during the concept and design
process for the environmental and social performance of the
project during operation or once in use; and is there a monitoring
programme in place for the operational phase?
20 pts
Client
Design
Construct
20

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out if the scheme concerned is intrinsically not operable, such as flood defence
banks.
* Targets have to be set for operating the completed works and a monitoring programme to be
undertaken once construction is complete has to be in place in order to score. Target setting
without monitoring progress is considered to be of little or no use.
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
2.5
Operational targets are likely to relate to quantifiable measures, such as waste production, energy
consumption, carbon dioxide production, natural resource consumption or pollution prevention.
For example, an operational target might state that 50% of waste produced in tonnes during the
first year of operation is to be recovered through either re-use, recycling or composting. Targets
may also cover maintenance issues such as paints to be used or how to deal with waste arising
from maintenance. Note that compliance with legislation cannot be regarded as an appropriate
operational target.
Evidence needs to demonstrate that such targets have been positively adopted by the
design team, for example through project team meeting minutes or equivalent. Although
any Environmental Statement (ES) may include targets or equivalent statements on a wide
range of issues such as operational noise or air pollution control, the presence of the ES is
not considered sufficient evidence here.
Communicating sustainability performance
2.5.1
19 pts
WORKFORCE CONSULTATION ON SUSTAINABILITY

PERFORMANCE
Has ongoing engagement or two-way dialogue between project
staff and the construction workforce been undertaken with regards
to management of environmental and social issues; and is there
evidence that the suggestions from these discussions have been
considered in the construction stage?
Client
Design
Construct
19
If No, score 0. If Yes score as indicated.

Scope-out
Guidance
this question will depend on the nature, scale, location and context of the project, and on
the interests and responsibilities of the parties to the project.
Question
Guidance
Experience so far on CEEQUAL-assessed Projects indicates that the CEEQUAL process often
triggers improvements to practice during both design and construction. This question focuses on
steps at the construction stage within the project team for dialogue between project staff and the
construction workforce that is aimed at identifying and communicating the lessons learnt and at
seeking out further improvements that can be made.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include records of meetings, toolbox talks, site posters or case studies.
30
CEEQUAL Ltd
2.5.2
COMMUNICATING BEST PRACTICE
18 pts
Has the project team shared any innovation or best practice in

sustainability-driven management and practice with other parts of
the civil engineering sector or other relevant sectors?
Client
Design
Construct
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score as indicated for each party to the project.
Scope-out
Guidance
this question will depend on the nature, scale, location and context of the project, and on
the interests and responsibilities of the parties to the project.
Like Question 2.5.1, this question is not aimed at trying to persuade project team members to
disclose commercially competitive information freely. Rather, it is aimed at rewarding those
project team members for preparing papers in professional journals, including reporting of
innovation in case studies prepared for CEEQUAL and other websites that promote innovation in
construction, so that at least the principles of the best practice and/or innovation are made more
widely known and therefore potentially exploitable by other project teams.
Question
Guidance
So the aim is to encourage and reward CEEQUAL users that:
report and demonstrate a practice that has gone beyond current engineering practice; and
is widely distributed and can be picked up by other parties and applied.
For innovation, the project team needs to demonstrate that a practice is being done for the first
time compared to best practice that is an further application of actions that have been carried out
once.
For the points to be scored, it is not necessary to demonstrate that the method reported is being
used by other parties, but that effective dissemination has been achieved.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include briefing sheet(s) published either internally or in industry

publications, or presentations to other companies or professional bodies, or involvement
with universities and students in related disciplines. All parties can get full points if the
project team has created a single joint case study that meets the criteria.
CEEQUAL Ltd
31
Section 3: People and Communities
3. PEOPLE AND COMMUNITIES

Section 3 brings together two major elements of the assessment concerned with the people affected by
any civil engineering, infrastructure, landscaping or public realm project the potential effects on
neighbours, both positive and negative, and the important actions of consultation and engagement with
stakeholders in the project.
The section is called People and Communities because some effects and benefits are at the level of individual
citizens, whereas others are at the community level either because many citizens are involved, or because a
civil engineering, infrastructure, landscaping or public realm project may affect not only the individuals in a
community but also its social fabric.
3.1
Brief and Design
Unlike some of the other environmental issues associated with construction, the area of effects on neighbours
covers issues that, by and large, do not have a great or long-lasting environmental impact. However, they can
cause serious inconvenience and stress amongst individuals and neighbouring communities during the period
of time over which they take place. They can also have an effect on animal and, to a lesser extent, plant
communities in the vicinity of the works.
Effects on neighbours, and especially nuisance, can often be one of the most important and difficult of
environmental aspects for a civil engineering project to deal with and get right, because it is largely about
disruption to human communities, however temporary. A community that is antipathetic towards a civil
engineering or public realm project may also decide that everything that is done on site is a nuisance whether
or not this really is the case. Overall, this makes impacts hard to define and assess.
Therefore, it is essential that a project team anticipates the potential for effects on neighbours at the earliest
opportunity. The following question set is broadly defined into three main sections of Brief and Design; Plan and
Consult; Implement and Monitor. However, in the absence of well-established environmental impact
assessment criteria around some of the temporary effects of construction, right and wrong are often determined
by the application of common law principles and legal debate over what constitutes a nuisance.
For further guidance on good practice regarding the issues assessed in this section refer to the CIRIAs
handbook Environmental good practice on site guide (third edition) (C692, 2010) and the Environmental good
practice on site- pocket book (C715, 2012).
3.1.1 (M) CONSIDERATE BEHAVIOUR

3.1.1 a)
(M)
3 pts
3.1.1 b)
(M)
3 pts
3.1.1 c)
(M)
3 pts
3.1.1 d)
3 pts
Does the project have a policy or code of practice regarding

considerate behaviour by construction companies?
Client
Design
Construct

Has the policy been communicated to all appropriate people
working on the project?

Is there evidence that the policy is embedded in the projects
management system?

Were the policy and its implementation independently assessed
and judged to be at least satisfactory?

Scope-out
Guidance
Parts a), b) and c) of the question are Mandatory. It may be appropriate in limited
circumstances to scope out part d), for example on very short duration projects.
In the UK, the Considerate Constructors Scheme may be an appropriate mechanism for
addressing Question 3.1.1 a). If the Contractor has their own policy or Code of Practice, then it
needs to cover, at a minimum:
Question
Guidance
32
relations with neighbours;

communications to neighbours;
good housekeeping;
presentation of the site;
CEEQUAL Ltd
relations with other stakeholders;

complaints procedures;
auditing process; and
commitment to thorough and systematic implementation of the policy.
There is little value in having a policy if it is not then communicated, implemented and monitored.
Communication should be both within the project team and externally to interested stakeholders.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a Code of Practice or Policy statement, registration with the

Considerate Constructors Scheme or similar, plus assessment results.
3.1.2
INNOVATIVE SOLUTIONS FOR NUISANCE MITIGATION

Are there any innovative solutions or other measures included in
the design of the project that go beyond those agreed at an earlier
planning permission or consenting stage that are intended to
mitigate any nuisance caused by the operation of the scheme once
constructed?
3.1.2 a)
27 pts
Client
Design
Construct
27

Has the Contractor applied any innovative solutions within the
construction methodology designed to remove or minimise any
nuisance during the construction stage?
3.1.2 b)
27 pts
27

Scope-out
Guidance
this question will depend on the nature, scale, location and context of the project.
Question
Guidance
Appropriate measures could include, for example, choice of surfacing material in roads, noise
bunds, sight screening and revised lighting. Note, however, that some measures may need
regulatory approval.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence for all scoring needs to be provided to show design changes made subsequent
to planning approval that were not also planning conditions. Further Contractor evidence
may be in the form of As Built Drawings. The ability of these changes to mitigate nuisance
needs to be mutually agreed between Assessor and Verifier.
3.2
Consultation with stakeholders
Establishing and maintaining a positive dialogue with community stakeholders early and throughout the whole
project process is more likely to result in a well-informed public, and will help to build a spirit of co-operation
with the relevant authorities, agencies and local community. As a minimum, every project should include a
consultation stage when initial design ideas are being developed and the views of stakeholders can be actively
considered. For the best outcomes, it should happen as early as practicable in every stage of the project.
This should then lead to an appropriate community relations programme for the duration of the project. This will
reduce delays during planning application, reduce the risk of environmental protest during site works, enhance
site community relations and provide greater acceptance of the completed scheme.
Compared to Effects on Neighbours, which are dealt with in Section 3.1, this section deals with the initial
consultation about the proposed project and how it might impact on the wider community issues. Continuing
with this community engagement is the subject of Section 3.5. The scope of community engagement implies a
two-way dialogue, and a relationship that goes far beyond the immediate impact of the construction project on
its direct or adjacent neighbours. In terms of best practice, it is not a requirement to demonstrate that every
piece of feedback has been incorporated into the project, but rather that each has been considered and then
either incorporated or an appropriate explanation given to the originator.
With changes in planning legislation in England and Wales, and a decentralised approach to planning already in
place in Scotland, localism is becoming a recognised approach for local communities to engage in local
development plans. This is likely to result in a more-iterative approach to design and greater opportunity to
engage with community during construction. Therefore, a better understanding of the demographics of the local
community will help to target interested parties and promote better engagement during the planning, design and
construction processes.
CEEQUAL Ltd
33
Who needs to be consulted? The local community is taken to mean the following groups:
neighbours who are close to but not adjacent to the project site;
neighbourhood forums
local interest groups;
the wider community people, schools, businesses, community schemes, charities and/or residents
associations who may be affected by or have an interest in the project.
Liaison with statutory authorities and agencies Relevant authorities include:
the local authority planning department;

the local authority environmental health department;
the local authority transport department;
the Environment Agency (EA), Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA), Northern Ireland
Environment Agency (NIEA) or equivalents;
Natural England (NE), Scottish National Heritage (SNH) or equivalents;
English Heritage or equivalents;
water companies or equivalents.
Liaison with Local Interest Groups is explained in Section 3.5.

Liaison with the Wider Community Examples of the wider community could be:
national or regional non-governmental organisations (NGOs);

the local Wildlife Trust or other local environmental groups;
local disability organisations.
3.2.1 (M) COMMUNITY CONSULTATION

3.2.1 a)
(M)
6 pts
Has a community consultation exercise been carried out by the

Client and the results been passed to appropriate members of the
project team and, as and where appropriate, the results fed back to
consultees?
Client
Design
Construct
3.2.1 b)
10 pts
Has a community consultation exercise been carried out at the

design and construction stages of the project and the results been
passed to appropriate members of the project team and, as and
where appropriate, the results fed back to consultees?

Question 3.2.1 a) is Mandatory because, even for a remote location with no immediate
neighbourhood, there may be stakeholder groups that ought to be consulted, such as
Scope-out
parks and wildlife authorities, the Ramblers Association, Environment Agency. If the initial
Guidance
consultation established that there are no interested parties, Question 3.2.1 b) should be
scoped out for design and construction.
Question
Guidance
Ideally, consultation should be carried out early for each stage of the overall process (for example,
at planning proposal stage, during design and before construction starts). Consultation exercises
can take the form of a simple public meeting or a full action-planning event, depending on the
scale and profile of the project. Other methods can be door-to-door surveys, leaflet drops and
newsletters, though the latter should mainly be a way of following up consultation that has already
taken place. Increasingly, such exercises are regarded as the start of an Engagement Strategy
with the local community rather than a community consultation.
It is important to bear in mind that simply providing information does not constitute consultation.
True consultation will offer other stakeholders the opportunity to become involved at least to a
certain extent in decision-making. Any kind of consultation exercise must therefore include a
feedback loop allowing the community to respond and their comments to be taken into account
as and where appropriate.
Evidence
Guidance
34
Evidence could be reports or minutes of meetings with appropriate groups that are carried
out at appropriate stages of the project. Evidence should also be provided to show how
information from these exercises is then communicated to the project team.
CEEQUAL Ltd
3.2.2 (M) STAKEHOLDER CONSULTATION
11 pts
Have all appropriate Stakeholders been consulted regarding the

effects on neighbours that are expected to occur during both the
construction stage and operation of the completed works?
Client
Design
Construct
11

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance

Consultation with the local authority may include the completion of a Section 61 application (or
Northern Ireland equivalent), or can lead to appropriate action being drawn up in liaison with the
Environmental Health Officer.
Note that implementation of feedback from stakeholders is assessed in Question 3.3.2 and this
question has to be scored before Question 3.3.2 can be scored because the designed mitigation
should be discussed with appropriate stakeholders.
Evidence could be reports or minutes of meetings with appropriate groups that are carried
out at appropriate stages of the project.
3.3 Effects on neighbours and planning of mitigation measures

Effective consultation and planning for minimising effects on neighbours requires consideration by the whole
project team of a wide range of topics, which although only cause temporary impacts can have wide ranging
effects on the quality of life of the neighbours to the project.
To score against the questions in this section evidence must be shown that demonstrates consideration of all
the different topics discussed in the following guidance.
Effects on neighbours is covered both by common law interpretation of what constitutes a nuisance and by
statutory legislation, including the Control of Pollution Act 1974 and the Environmental Protection Act 1990.
Section 60 of the Control of Pollution Act allows Great Britains* local authorities to control noise from
construction sites by serving a Section 60 Notice. A developer may apply for prior consent for construction
works through a Section 61 Consent. Provided the terms and conditions of that consent have been adhered to,
this acts as a defence against prosecution under Section 60.
* In Northern Ireland the equivalent relevant legislation is the Pollution Control and Local Government (Northern
Ireland) Order SI 1978/1049, Articles 40 & 41.
Noise and vibration
It is considered good practice to liaise with the local authority and any site neighbours regarding noise issues.
The local authority may invite the Contractor to apply for Section 61 consent prior to any potentially noisy works.
Even if the consent is not required or not considered appropriate by the local authority, it will still require the
Contractor to consider the likely noise impacts of the development.
Noise can have powerful effects on humans, animals and the environment. The ability of noise and vibration to
disturb, annoy and cause stress should not be underestimated either during construction or in operation.
Consultation should therefore be carried out and initial background noise surveys commissioned.
BS5228 Code of practice for noise and vibration control on construction and open sites provides guidance on
noise levels from construction and what measures can be expected to minimise the adverse effects caused by
noisy operations. For instance, in noise-sensitive areas, careful selection of plant is important. As a rule of
thumb, older construction machinery tends to be noisier than newer models, and it may be helpful to avoid their
use on sites where noise levels are a significant issue.
Ground-borne noise is low-frequency noise (perceived as a rumble) and is normally only an issue when
airborne noise levels are very low. Some people and species are sensitive to both ground-borne noise and
vibration, and the levels that disturb them are considerably lower than the levels that have the potential to cause
damage to buildings and other structures. The control of vibration levels that could cause damage should
primarily be regarded as part of the engineering of the scheme, not its environmental management. However, it
must be recognised that, depending on the scale of the development and the sensitivity of the location, noise
and vibration generated during construction can be a major factor in the overall environmental impact of the
scheme.
CEEQUAL Ltd
35
Structure borne noise is a term used to describe noise transmitted through a structure to a point a significant
distance from the noise source. It reaches a receiving person as airborne noise but the proximate source
maybe part of a structure, or a pipe or other static equipment attached to the structure is not the original
source of the noise.
Typically, adverse vibration lies within the frequency range of approximately 10 to 250Hz and ground borne
noise approximately 150 to 1000Hz.
Guidance on air pollution during operation
General guidance on air pollution during operation may be found in the Air Quality Strategy for England,
Scotland, Wales and Northern Ireland, 17 July 2007 available from Defra Publications
(www.defra.gov.uk/environment/quality/air/air-quality/air-quality-publications/).
In addition, information and central government advice to local authorities in the Local Air Quality Management
Regulations (LAQM) can be found in the following documents, also available from Defra Publications:
Local Air Quality Management Policy Guidance (PG09), February 2009.

Local Air Quality Management Technical Guidance (TG09), February 2009.
Guidance on air pollution during construction

The Greater London Authority, in partnership with the London Councils, has produced a guidance document,
The control of dust and emissions from construction and demolition: Best Practice Guidance (November 2006),
which provides appropriate guidance on the control of emissions from construction sites in London, but much of
the advice is equally applicable to other locations.
Dust created by a variety of means, such as soil stripping, bulk excavation, vehicle movements, cutting and
handling materials, can be a source of great nuisance to local neighbours and may adversely affect the health
of people, wildlife and crops. Dust is a problem on most construction sites. Odours are less of a problem, but
can be very unpleasant when they do occur.
Even low concentrations of dust can affect plant and fruit growth, especially if the dust is highly alkaline, such
as limestone or cement. Construction sites in agricultural areas therefore need to take particular care to prevent
dust emissions, as do construction sites near sensitive habitats such as heathland or acid grassland.
Restricting works that may cause a high level of dust in certain weather conditions (for example, wind in a
certain direction) may be one way to avoid potential problems. Once dust is airborne, however, it is difficult to
stop it. The most effective strategy is therefore to prevent dust being generated in the first place. Careful design
of construction operations, including the location of stockpiles and batching plant, can reduce dust. Damping
down, using either water or water with chemical additives or binders, is another established method to avoid
dust pollution.
If dust-generating activities cannot be avoided, it may help to erect screens to act either as windbreaks or as
dust screens. These can take the form of permeable or semi-permeable fences. Trees or shrubs planted early
as part of site landscaping can also provide some screening, as can retention of existing vegetation.
Light pollution
Light can have adverse effects on neighbours when it spills into surrounding buildings and/or is excessively
bright. It can also be a waste of energy. Light sources that minimise spillage and illuminate only those areas
that need it are likely to cause the least adverse effect on neighbours.
3.3.1
22 pts
IDENTIFICATION OF POTENTIAL EFFECTS ON NEIGHBOURS

Have baseline studies and predictions for all potential effects on
Neighbours been carried out for the project and have proposals
been put forward for mitigating effects potentially occurring during
(1) construction and (2) operation?
Client
Design
Construct
22
If No, score 0. If Yes for (1), score 11. If Yes for (2), score 11.
This question can be scoped out only if there is genuinely no operational or construction
impacts or no neighbours, sensitive wildlife habitats (not just protected species) or public
Scope-out recreation areas that might be affected by the works. To scope these questions out
Guidance evidence must be provided to demonstrate that there were genuinely no nuisance (noise,
vibration, dust, odour, air quality or lighting) effects of any kind that needed consideration
on the project.
36
CEEQUAL Ltd
Question
Guidance
Although noise and vibration effects are the first to come to mind as effects on those close to new
schemes, consideration must be given to all forms of potential pollution emissions and nuisance
that could affect neighbours (including wildlife and certain plant life) in the proximity of the scheme
during both the construction and operational stages. Baseline studies required will be dependent
upon each individual project location and operations, though these should be predictable,
assessable and documented.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should be a written report on the results of the baseline studies appropriate to
the scale of the project. Evidence may be found in the Environmental Statement if one was
completed.
3.3.2
MITIGATING EFFECTS ON NEIGHBOURS
22 pts
Have appropriate proposals to mitigate effects on neighbours

during construction and operation been incorporated into the
design(s) (as consulted with stakeholders)?
Client
Design
Construct
22
If No, score 0.
Mitigation incorporated into design for construction, score 11.
Mitigation incorporated into design for operation, score 11.
This question can be scoped out only if there is genuinely no operational or construction
impacts or no neighbours, sensitive wildlife habitats (not just protected species) or public
Scope-out
recreation areas that might be affected by the works. To scope out the questions evidence
Guidance
must be shown to prove that there were genuinely no nuisance (noise, vibration, dust,
odour, air quality or lighting) effects of any kind that needed consideration on the project.
This question is linked to Question 3.2.2 if no score is gained in Question 3.2.2, no score
can be gained in this question because the designed mitigation should be discussed with
appropriate stakeholders.
Examples of possible mitigation measures:
Construction noise: Example measures could include the early development of bunds that help
screen construction noise and later become part of the overall landscaping of a project, or
Designer input in the phasing of the development or the timing of noisy works.
Possible measures to limit disruption include time restrictions to limit noisy operations to certain
hours of the day (or to limit very noisy operations to short, intermittent spells), using mufflers or
silencers on equipment, reducing drop heights into lorries or skips, or erecting noise screens
around the site.
Question
Guidance
Vibration: For example, use of hydraulic shears instead of hydraulic impact breakers; jacking of
steel sheet piles instead of hammer-driven piling; use of chemical splitters or falling weight
breakers instead of pneumatic breakers and drills.
Operational impacts on local air quality: Appropriate measures may include low-emission
boilers for water and wastewater treatment plants, fitment of covers to tanks at such works, and
spray facilities at solid-waste treatment facilities.
Construction stage emissions (incl. dust and odour): Example measures include damping
down haul roads and siting of dust-producing operations away from neighbours, or appropriate
selection of construction plant and its regular maintenance to ensure emissions are kept within
strict limits
Light pollution: All lighting for the final project, as well as all compound and site lighting, should
be designed to prevent spillage of light into neighbouring buildings and/or areas. Construction
lighting in particular is often extremely powerful, to allow work to continue safely outside daylight
hours. Apart from causing considerable nuisance and disrupting the sleep of site neighbours, it
can also cause disruption to wildlife.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence would include two-way correspondence with relevant stakeholders with regard to
predicted impacts and proposed mitigation measures, particularly including the local
authority on noise and air quality related matters and Section 61 (or Northern Ireland
equivalent) consent (if granted).
CEEQUAL Ltd
37
3.4 Implementation and monitoring during construction

3.4.1 (M) CONSTRUCTION EFFECTS ON NEIGHBOURS
Client
Design
Has a SEMP or equivalent section in a Project Environmental

Management Plan considered the effects of the construction
process on neighbours?
27 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Construct
27
If No, score 0.
If (i) Plan includes all issues described in the guidance
below, score 11.
And (ii) Plan implemented, score 16.
And (iii) Implementation of the plan monitored including corrective
action, score 27.
Note that this question is marked as Mandatory. What matters is that these issues have
been considered. If on consideration it was found that no specific measures are necessary
on your project for any or all of the issues to be considered, the points can still be given,
as long as evidence can be provided that this decision has been made consciously.
Points can only be scored for ii) and iii) if the plan is comprehensive.
Included in this plan or section of a plan should be:
Question
Guidance
guidance or method statements on how to avoid unnecessary noise and ground-borne

noise;
measures to reduce disruption caused by site traffic;
measures to minimise dust and odour emissions; and
measures to avoid light pollution.
Note that the plan needs to cover all four issues to score the points under the question.
Some examples of such measures are listed in the relevant sub-sections in this chapter. For
further guidance see CIRIA Publication: Environmental good practice on site guide (third edition)
(C692).
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence can be in the form of a SEMP or appropriate section of a Project Environmental

Management Plan supported by consultation documents such as letters or emails, project
newsletters and public event notices.
3.4.2
IMPLEMENTATION OF MITIGATION MEASURES
3.4.2 a)
19 pts
Is there evidence that the proposals to mitigate for all potential

effects on neighbours during the construction period were
implemented?
Client
Design
Construct
19

3.4.2 b)
19 pts
Has the Contractor applied any innovative solutions within the

construction methodology designed to remove or minimise any
nuisance during the construction phase?
19

Scope-out
Guidance
This question can be scoped out only if Question 3.4.1 above shows that there are
genuinely no construction related nuisance issues of any kind.
Question
Guidance
No question-specific guidance provided.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence can be included in the relevant sections of the SEMP or in drawings and
specifications, minutes of site meetings or photographic evidence for physical measures.
38
CEEQUAL Ltd
3.4.3
MONITORING OF EFFECTS ON NEIGHBOURS
16 pts
Were all aspects that could have had potential effects on

neighbours (identified at Question 3.3.1) monitored at appropriate
intervals throughout the construction stage?
Client
Design
Construct
16

Scope-out
Guidance
This question can be scoped out only if Question 3.3.1 shows that there are genuinely no
construction related nuisance issues of any kind.
Question
Guidance
It is acknowledged that it is very easy to accidentally exceed emission restrictions for short
periods. What is assessed here is whether monitoring has taken place and has effectively
assisted in alerting site staff to breaches in limits so that appropriate control measures could be
taken.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence would include Pollution Prevention and Control plans and Action Plans to
prevent excessive emissions. These should include appropriate emission monitoring
records and methods statements if these were considered needed. Any monitoring of
noise should be appropriate to the frequencies likely to be encountered (as explained in
the introduction to Section 3.3).
3.4.4
ACHIEVEMENT OF EFFECTIVE MITIGATION DURING

CONSTRUCTION
12 pts
Client
Design
Did the monitoring of aspects assessed at Question 3.4.3

demonstrate that acceptable levels of emissions from all aspects
(leading to potential effects) were achieved throughout the
construction stage?
Construct
12
If No, score 0.
If No, but corrective action successfully taken, score 6.
If Yes in full, score 12.
Scope-out
Guidance
this question will depend on the nature, scale, location and context of the project, for
example only very short duration projects.
Question
Guidance

Evidence would need to show that any exceedances have been acted upon promptly and
effectively. Such evidence may be found within a complaints procedure and associated
remediation action plans and/or follow-up procedures and records.
Evidence
Guidance
For full marks, a full set of monitoring data for the full length of the construction works
must be provided. This must demonstrate that there were no exceedances, or that any
exceedances due to unpredictable circumstances were managed, remedied within an
acceptable timeframe with lessons learned, and communicated.
3.4.5 (M) ENFORCEMENT NOTICES

21 pts
On completion of the contract, have any enforcement notices or

fines been served and not revoked?
Client
Design
Construct
21
If Yes, score 0. If No, score as indicated.

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance

In the UK context, an enforcement notice is most likely to be an Abatement Notice issued by the
Local Authority.
Note that a justified Abatement Notice may classify as a major incident in relation to the allowable
maximum score discussed in the CEEQUAL Assessment Process Handbook. They may cover
CEEQUAL Ltd
39
any nuisance assessed in this section such as noise, vibration, dust and light.
The context here is that Contractors should aim for a proactive relationship with the sites
neighbours and the local authority such that the local authority is not forced to issue an
Abatement Notice. The element of revoking the notice is there to acknowledge that Abatement
Notices can be served erroneously, or as part of some local authorities standing procedures for
short-term or accidental exceedances, which are then mitigated through appropriate control
measures.
A signed statement from the Project Director will be acceptable evidence for this.
Evidence
Guidance
Note that failure to score against this question may affect the final Award grade if there has
been a legal non-compliance.
3.4.6
PHYSICAL DAMAGE BY VIBRATION
7 pts
On completion of the contract, has any physical damage been

caused to buildings and structures by vibration from construction
processes?
Client
Design
Construct

Scope-out
Guidance
This question can be scoped out only if there was genuinely no vibration caused by the
project during construction.
Question
Guidance
This question focuses on vibration, rather than on physical damage that may have other causes
(such as trucks damaging verges). It is one of CEEQUALs questions that cannot be proved by
positive evidence hence the requirement for a signed statement from the Project Director.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should be a signed statement from the Project Director that the project caused
no vibration damage during construction.
3.4.7 (M) VISUAL IMPACT DURING CONSTRUCTION

8 pts
Client
Design
Is there evidence that measures have been taken to minimise the

adverse visual impact of the site during the construction stage?
Construct

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
A common complaint about construction sites is that they look a mess. Materials are too often
scattered all over the place along with various items of litter. Proper storage of materials can
result not only in a tidier site that is visually less unpleasant but also in a safer site, and can also
significantly reduce wastage. Regular clearance of litter makes the site look tidier and enhances a
culture of environmental care amongst staff.
Example measures include appropriate site screening, allocation of stacking areas, tidy storage of
materials, a regular site inspection, litter-pick and site tidy-up, and inspection and cleaning of site
hoardings.
Evidence
Guidance
These measures could be laid out as part of a SEMP or equivalent. In the absence of such
a plan, other evidence is required to identify the measures taken and verify their
implementation, for example, site records, photographic evidence.
3.4.8
MITIGATION OF OPERATION EFFECTS
19 pts
Have the proposals for mitigation of all potential effects for the
operational stage been implemented in full as far as can be
expected at the end of construction?
Client
Design
Construct
19
40
CEEQUAL Ltd
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Note that implemented must be assessed appropriately up to the point of the assessment being
done. If all mitigation measures are included in the scope of the project being assessed, then
points can be scored only if they have been implemented in full. However, if the measures need to
be implemented during the early stages of operation after the completion of the construction
stage, then the assessments must be against what can reasonably be achieved by the end of
construction, not against a prediction of what is anticipated to be implemented in the long term.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence would need to show that any features incorporated in the design to reduce
nuisance effects have not been removed during construction,
3.5
Continuing engagement with relevant local interest groups
Examples of local interest groups with an interest in the environmental and social performance of a project
could include:
charities, Not-for-profit and Non-Governmental Organisations (NGOs);

residents associations;
Chambers of Commerce;
Local Agenda 21 Transition groups or similar;
voluntary environmental groups (for example, the British Trust of Conservation Volunteers);
local Wildlife Trusts; and
local recycling or materials exchange schemes.
3.5.1 (M) RESPONSIBILITY FOR COMMUNITY CONSULTATION

6 pts
Has a member of the project team been made responsible for

ongoing community consultation?
Client
Design
Construct

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
For each project there should be someone nominated to be responsible for ongoing community
consultation, even if it is merely to handle enquiries from interested parties.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of a letter appointing someone to be responsible or it could

be included in a Project Management Plan. In either case, responsibilities need to be
defined.
3.5.2
COMMUNITY ENGAGEMENT
21 pts
Has there been a continuing community engagement programme

covering all relevant project stages?
Client
Design
Construct

It will be very unusual for this question to be scoped out. There may be very rare
circumstances where no interested parties have been indentified during the initial
Scope-out consultation and therefore a continuing community engagement programme could be
Guidance regarded as unnecessary. However, it can be argued there is always opportunity and
potential benefit for a project team to engage with local communities or other stakeholders
see final paragraph of the guidance below.
Question
Guidance
Whereas a community consultation exercise (Question 3.2.1) is a specific milestone event

which may be carried out at more than one stage of a project a community relations programme
is an ongoing effort to maintain a dialogue with all community stakeholders throughout the
planning, design and construction processes. It should not be just a mechanism for handling
complaints; it should be a two-way engagement with the community.
CEEQUAL Ltd
41
A thorough and effective community relations programme should consider environmental, social
and economic effects including, for example, the following elements:
the significant environmental impacts of the final constructed asset, perhaps (but not
necessarily) evaluated by an EIA;
the significant environmental impacts of the construction stage, perhaps (but not
necessarily) evaluated by an EIA;
transportation impacts, perhaps (but not necessarily) resulting from a Transport Impact
Assessment;
livelihood impacts of the construction process;
timing and programme of the works for design and construction stages;
employment and skill development opportunities during the works and resulting from the
final project.
An effective community relations programme should also manage the expectations of the
consultees. In other words, consultation should not lead to unrealistic expectations of the project.
If no interested parties have been indentified during the initial consultation (and therefore a
continuing community engagement programme could be regarded as unnecessary) it is important
to recognise four main issues that may arise:
First, the initial consultation may not have reached a representative sample of the
community.
Secondly, sensitivities are not always flushed out at the start it can take a very long time
for all interested parties to catch on to the proposal for or existence of a project.
Thirdly, however remote the site, change to it could affect neighbours in ways not obvious
to the project team.
Finally, even if the community is generally supportive, sensitivities and opportunities may
only become apparent further into the project lifespan.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence needs to show a programme of community engagement activities carried out.

These could include leaflet drops, press releases, websites, documentation of open
evenings, minutes from regular liaison group meetings. However the programme is
constructed it must include two-way dialogue (as described in Question 3.2.1) Evidence
needs to show these activities actually taking place and the relevant groups having been
invited and/or taking part. This could be in the form of meeting minutes, correspondence,
and/or attendance lists.
3.5.3
COMMUNITY DEMOGRAPHICS
20 pts
Has the community engagement programme assessed the

community demographics and diversity to ensure that
communication is appropriately targeted?
Client
Design
Construct
20

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
In a community where the majority of residents are pensioners, a website and emails may not be
the most effective form of communication. Equally by holding public meetings and open days
during working hours is likely to exclude a certain demographic of the community. It is important to
arrange project communications to reflect the demographics to maximise its reach and benefit.
Evidence
Guidance
42
Evidence could include a communication strategy that identified the demographics of the
local community and how communications should be targeted accordingly.
CEEQUAL Ltd
3.5.4 (M) PARTNERSHIP LINKS
Client
Is there evidence that partnership links have been actively pursued

through the design process and promoted for the construction
stage?
3.5.4 a)
(M)
8 pts
Design
Construct

Has the Contractor implemented the links identified by the Client,
or significant links that the Client has not identified?
19
If No, score 0
If 25% of Client-identified partnership links score 4 points.
If alternative partnership links the Client has not identified score 3
points whatever the percentage scored on Client-identified links.
3.5.4 b)
(M)
19 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
For every project, even in remote locations or on small projects, there is likely to be potential to
establish links with local schools, residents or community groups, or other organisations that could
benefit from an exchange of skills or donation of material or knowledge. Examples of links could
include donation of surplus materials to community organisations (such as local construction
colleges, or voluntary groups), physical improvement of community infrastructure (such as repairs
to village halls, community centres or parks) or links with schools to raise awareness of the role of
civil engineering in society and the career paths it has to offer.
Evidence
Guidance
Appropriate evidence needs to be provided to show the relationships formed and how
extensive they are in relation to the scale of the project.
3.6
Effectiveness of the community engagement programme
The community engagement programme must demonstrate actions taken by the Designer and/or Contractors in
response to community participation.
Clearly, any community consultation is valid only if comments are taken into account and, where necessary or
appropriate, changes are made to plans, designs or construction processes to try to accommodate concerns
raised at the consultation. At the least, a system should be in place, as part of the community consultation
programme or on its own, whereby any comments or complaints are registered and any action taken as a result
is recorded.
3.6.1
RECORDING COMMUNITY COMMENTS
9 pts
Has there been a mechanism to ensure that all comments from the
3
local community were recorded?
Client
Design
Construct

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
If comments from the local community are to be effectively acted upon where appropriate, and for
the community to respect the outcomes of the project teams consideration of their input, then a
mechanism to record those inputs clearly is a very important first step.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of meeting minutes with liaison groups. A complaints
procedure may also provide evidence, but the definition of a complaint may restrict what is
recorded.
CEEQUAL Ltd
43
3.6.2
ASSESSING COMMUNITY COMMENTS DESIGN

Has the Client and design team assessed all the responses from
the community engagement programme and taken appropriate
action within the project decision making and design?
Client
Design
Construct
30
If No, score 0.
For assessing responses, score 6.
For taking appropriate action, score 15.
For evidence of feedback to relevant stakeholders, score 24.
For evidence that stakeholders are satisfied with the feedback,
score 30.
30 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Note also that there is no intent with this question for the Client and design team to always accede
to actions requested in the responses, only to have a process for incorporating them into project
decision-making and the design team, and for feeding outcomes back to relevant stakeholder(s).
Evidence
Guidance
Appropriate evidence could show how comments from the community have been
assessed and taken into account in the decision-making process and/or design, such as a
Consultation Report or Statement of Community Involvement. Feedback and evidence of
stakeholders satisfaction may be through feedback questionnaires and surveys.
3.6.3
ASSESSING COMMUNITY COMMENTS CONSTRUCTION

Has the construction team assessed the responses from the
community engagement programme and taken appropriate action
within the construction stage?
Client
Design
Construct
30
If No, score 0.
For assessing responses, score 6.
For taking appropriate action, score 15.
For evidence of feedback to relevant stakeholders, score 24.
For evidence that stakeholders are satisfied with the feedback,
score 30.
30 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out if the community relations programme was organised and managed by others
and the Contractor was not involved separately from other members of the team in
considering the responses from the programme.
Question
Guidance
Note also that there is no intent with this question for changes that the project team judge are
needless or pointless to be made just to score the CEEQUAL points.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be any amendments to proposals or designs as a result of comments from

consultation with the community. There should be a record of any consultation that has
taken place and changes or arrangements as a result of this (for example, changing the
alignment of the access road), as well as the record of complaints or comments and what
action was taken as a result.
3.7
Human environment, aesthetics and employment
There are two main impacts or implications of civil engineering projects on the human environment: those on
the end users, any operational staff and others affected by the project, and those on construction workers. End
users and others affected are normally considered at the planning stage; construction workers are protected by
health, safety and welfare legislation, including the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations.
However, an environmentally responsible project team should demonstrate that the needs of all potentiallyaffected people have been considered as an integral part of the design and construction processes. It is often
easy to neglect the impacts on the human environment as not being engineering-driven, yet the solutions
invariably are, or have an effect on our decisions. By addressing human environment issues at every stage, the
44
CEEQUAL Ltd
project team should be able to avoid expensive delays in both design and construction programmes due to last
minute changes or dispute resolution, and should be able to foster good community relations.
Aesthetics and visual impact have not always been considered to be of prime importance to civil engineers,
particularly if an architect is involved with the project. However, with the methods of project procurement
currently being used, the role of civil engineers is expanding and the aesthetics of design is becoming more
important to design engineers. In any event, civil engineers should be aware of aesthetic issues in design and
use their influence to achieve an environmentally sound project.
Local employment
The question in this section on encouraging local companies to work on the project is part of thinking more
broadly about how the project can provide additional value to the local community, from a combined economic,
social and environmental perspective. Following on from a review of the economic, social and environmental
impacts in Section 1: Project Strategy, the use of local skills and labour can have additional benefits in
community pride and perceived ownership.
User enjoyment
The concept of how enjoyable a structure is may not be considered applicable to civil engineering projects but
more the province of architects and planners. However, design and construction engineers can have a
significant input to this and should be encouraged to participate fully in shaping the project to achieve what is
sometimes called the wow-factor, generated by structures of high aesthetic value.
In this context, how enjoyable something is should not just apply to users. Almost any built structure can
provide a wow-factor or enjoyment to neighbours, visitors, passers-by anyone who sees or experiences it if
it is designed to be aesthetically pleasing and add value beyond its practical function. Conversely, any built
structure that is not aesthetically pleasing can become regarded as aesthetically unpleasant, however useful
and necessary its function may be.
The assessment of these factors is necessarily subjective. The evidence of success for these factors must be at
least by demonstration that best practice has been used in accordance with the softer social standards as well
as those for engineering. The design factor should be considered for any project, for example the aesthetics of
a bridge or, on a more practical level, the ventilation of tunnels. Another good example is the design of major
road junctions, where the needs of all its different users (for example, drivers, cyclists and pedestrians) need to
be considered equally.
3.7.1
20 pts
WIDER SOCIAL BENEFITS
Client
Is there evidence that due consideration has been given, during the
11
projects feasibility stage and during design, to wider social benefits
of the project during construction and operation, and to the effects
of the completed project on the human environment?
Design
Construct

It is unlikely that Questions 3.7.1 will be scoped out often and is likely to be justified only
on very small projects, but it is possible, particularly on small projects, that the social
Scope-out
impacts will be judged to be not significant enough to warrant a formal social impacts
Guidance
assessment. So the decision by the Assessor and Verifier on whether to scope out this
question will depend on the nature, scale, location and context of the project.
There are three main issues to be considered for this question and Question 3.7.2:
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
Social impacts during construction on the workforce and on the local community, for
example facilities for the workforce, increased traffic, congestion, influx of the workforce
into the local community, and potential severance through the location of and
arrangement for site access.
Social impacts on the local community as a result of the existence of the finished project,
for example, severing communities (by a road scheme), linking communities (bridge),
increased traffic, greater mobility, improved services, and/or increased employment.
Social impacts on users and/or occupiers of the completed project, which are influenced
by its design.
Evidence could include a formal social impact assessment, the human factors aspects of
an EIA, records of wide-ranging stakeholder consultation or similar. Any evidence
provided should demonstrate consideration of all three points listed above.
CEEQUAL Ltd
45
3.7.2 (M) HEALTH & WELFARE ISSUES
16 pts
Is there evidence that potential impacts of the project on the health

and welfare of the construction workforce and any occupants,
users, neighbours and/or any operational staff have been
considered, and the design modified as a result?
Client
Design
Construct
If No, score 0. If Yes, score as indicated

Scope-out
Guidance

These measures must be beyond the legislation requirements of health and safety regulations
such as CDM such as recommendations from a Health Impact Assessment.
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
Whilst Health & Safety Plans do require consideration of the health of operators, this question is
also looking for the less tangible health issues that do not come under the legal requirements of
CDM. An example is the provision of natural light within buildings (such as covered wastewater
treatment works), or provision of planters for growing fruit and vegetables, or facilities for sports
and outdoor games which will indirectly improve the well-being of operators. If the
recommendations of a Health Impact Assessment (HIA) for the project have been incorporated
into the design, points can be awarded.
Evidence could include the design brief, meeting minutes, and reports from assessments
and/or consultation. A Health & Safety Plan and/or Health & Safety Records File prepared
under the CDM Regulations that does not expressly also include future users and
occupants of the completed project is not sufficient.
3.7.3 (M) INVOLVEMENT OF LOCAL FIRMS
22 pts
Has the Client set specific targets to actively encourage local firms
to quote for work, competitively or otherwise? Have these targets
been achieved during construction? Or is evidence provided
showing why local firms are not appropriate?
Client
11
Design
Construct
11

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance

Targets set by the Client may be a proportion of materials and services sourced from within a
certain radius of the projects (such as 40km2) or a defined geographical area, (such as local
authority boundary). The benefits of setting aspirational targets to source materials and services
locally include community engagement and ownership of the scheme, providing jobs to the local
community, reducing transportation costs and use of fossil fuel.
For supply of specialist items or services to UK projects, local may mean Europe, as opposed to
Asia or South America. Competition rules may prevent actual selection on grounds of location or
proximity, but do not prevent encouraging local firms to bid for work on the same terms as any
other bidder.
Evidence
Guidance
46
Evidence could be a copy of the Clients requirements stating specific targets, and a
summary of materials and/or services to procure in line with theses Client requirements.
The mere fact that one or two suppliers happened to have been local cannot be considered
as sufficient evidence.
CEEQUAL Ltd
3.7.4
20 pts
ENHANCEMENT BEYOND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

Is there evidence that consideration has been given to enhancing
the project design features, user enjoyment and additional facilities
for the benefit of users beyond functional requirements of the
facility and that this has been fully achieved in the construction
stage?
Client
Design
10
Construct

Scope-out
Guidance
This can only be scoped out if Question 3.7.2 has been scoped out.
Example measures could include providing viewing points, picnic areas and lay-bys with toilets on
road projects and bridges, viewing points and picnic/leisure areas on dams and reservoirs,
footpath access to river frontages after new flood defence schemes are built, or providing
additional moorings on a waterway embankment protection project. For the construction stage,
measures could include high quality screening.
Question
Guidance
A key aspect that can affect what is often termed joy in use is the detailed execution at the
construction stage. Poor detailing can negate the best design by either adding a point of visual
dysfunction or result in the project being less user-friendly. Examples can be the late addition of
ventilation units to a structure due to poor specification or inappropriate design changes, or
pathways that make sudden turns to avoid other infrastructure. Alternatively, positive changes
during the construction stage can improve joy in use.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence can be in the form of briefs, specifications and other documents that
demonstrate inclusion of features that give benefit to occupiers and/or users. At design
stage, design records or drawings could show incorporation of these features. At the
construction stage, photographs or as complete drawings which demonstrate how the
design concept has been met or exceeded.
3.7.5
COMMUNITY DIVERSITY
24 pts
Client
Is there evidence that the diversity of the local community has been
12
considered and respected in the design solution to promote equal
access for all (for example, disabled, elderly people, and different
cultures and religions) and the specification achieved in the
completed project?
Design
Construct
12

Scope-out
Guidance
Can be scoped out on projects where there are no identifiable occupiers or users.
Question
Guidance
In terms of the needs of disabled people and the elderly, consideration needs to be given to the
needs of people with non-physical impairments such as sensory impairments. The detailed
execution at the construction stage is key to the usability of a project by people with disabilities
such as if health and safety requirements result in a toilet door being hung the opposite way it
may result in the toilet being unusable by a wheelchair user. With regards to different cultures,
consideration should be given to using clear visual messages and using different languages in
signage.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence would be in the design brief, design team meeting minutes, civic awards, code of
construction practice, and/or a Disability Discrimination Act audit.
CEEQUAL Ltd
47
Section 4: Land use and Landscape
4. LAND USE AND LANDSCAPE

$ Note that sub-sections 4.1 to 4.3 cover use of land (whether above or below water) and subsections 4.4 to 4.7 with landscape, although there are a few questions that need consideration of both.
4.1
Basic principles on the use of land (whether above or below water)
Land is a scarce resource. In a crowded country like the UK, the pressures on land from competing uses such
as development, recreation, nature conservation, water resource management, heritage and agriculture are
high. Land below water (whether fresh or marine) is also becoming crowded with various types of infrastructure,
such as pipelines.
By contrast, with land above water, in many areas of the world the land under water (such as the seabed,
estuary beds, or the beds of inland lakes) is regarded as a free good that can be exploited in ways that would
be unacceptable on land. Whilst marine and offshore projects could be assessed under CEEQUAL Version 4.1,
this Version 5 of the CEEQUAL Methodology now expressly includes assessment of marine and offshore
projects (ports and harbours, wind farms, oil & gas production, and pipelines) and therefore includes
consideration of the use of seabed by such installations, and the effects of such works on the marine
environment and ecosystem. This is also applicable to land under inland water bodies.
In preparing this Version 5 Projects Manual, the CEEQUAL Team has included a number of specific mentions
where seabed, the marine environment and/or land under inland waters should be actively considered, but it is
down to the Assessor of projects in or affecting such environments to regard the term land use to also include
the use of these underwater beds where appropriate. There is no distance limit from the shoreline for this
consideration irrespective of whether the seabed is the responsibility of the Crown Estate, Marine Management
Organisation, or others.
While many civil engineering and public realm projects intrinsically improve environmental quality and human
well-being, they are still often perceived by many in society as having a damaging effect on the living
environment. This perception is exacerbated where the land (whether above or below water) taken up for a
project has value for any one of a wide range of uses or benefits agricultural, environmental, nature
conservation, mineral resource, recreational or amenity.
Careful planning and implementation of civil engineering and public realm projects, together with a good
communications and consultation strategy, can help to optimise land-use or underwater bed-use decisions,
enabling safe, efficient and appropriate use of land and reducing pressure on previously undeveloped
greenfield sites. In urban areas this includes remediation of land contamination, re-use of previously developed
brownfield or derelict land and urban regeneration. In rural areas, it can assist with the conservation of
specific land resources and ecological habitats, such as woodland or wetland.
In this section, both the appropriateness of the chosen location and the design concept are examined in relation
to brownfield and greenfield land-use, management and treatment of land or underwater-bed contamination,
and land-use efficiency all are assessed. Location and land-use decisions in relation to flood risks, local
amenity and soil or mineral resource preservation (inclusive of peat and agricultural land quality and
productivity) are also covered. Detailed issues relating to water resource management, ecology, archaeology,
pollution prevention, waste, materials use, transport, and other issues, although related to land use, are
considered in other sections of this Manual.
Site selection plays an important role in determining the overall environmental effects of a project. For example,
selection of sites with existing infrastructure sufficient for the new site use will minimise the need for the
construction of new roads or railways. Existing local water resources may avoid the need for additional pipeline
construction. On marine and offshore projects, siting of facilities on important spawning or fishing grounds can
greatly disrupt the environment and economic activity.
Using a site with characteristics appropriate for the proposed project in terms of topography, geology and soils,
ecological importance, water resources, landscape character, and historical importance will also contribute to
using land or seabed to the best effect.
$ Refurbishment projects that use land beyond the existing boundary only for temporary site
compounds will need to carefully review the questions to decide if they are relevant or not, for instance
a site compound could generate additional flood risk or potential for contamination.
48
CEEQUAL Ltd
4.1.1
PROJECT LOCATION ALTERNATIVES
4.1.1 a)
35 pts
Is there evidence that the Client has collected sufficient and

relevant information to be able to make appropriate and positive
decisions on the projects location?
Client
Design
Construct
35

4.1.1 b)
35 pts
Was there a demonstrable process for considering the relative

merits of the options?
35

This question must not be scoped out except where the Client can demonstrate that they
had absolutely no choice about the projects location, for projects that involve structures
Scope-out
that are necessary for health & safety (for example, navigation equipment along coastlines
Guidance
or in the sea, or improvements to waste-water treatment plants) or to enable access to a
site for public education or enjoyment.
Question
Guidance
In civil engineering, there is often little or no choice of project location for example a remodelling
of a motorway or railway junction. However, there are projects where there are opportunities for
an active choice of site location to be made on a range of grounds for example lighthouses,
canal-side or riverside marinas, water treatment works or a new reservoir so this question is
challenging Clients to actively consider issues of site characteristics, environmental issues and
flood risk in their selection of the most appropriate location for their project.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence must be provided to demonstrate that genuine consideration of options has been
undertaken.
4.1.2 (M) JUSTIFICATION OF SITE SUITABILITY
4.1.2 a)
(M)
35 pts
4.1.2 b)
(M)
35 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Have desk and site studies been undertaken that assisted the
Client in confirming that their chosen site was suitable?
Client
Design
Construct
35
If No, score 0.
If comprehensive desk study, score 25.
If comprehensive information thorough desk study and site
walkover, score 35.
Was there a clear process for the evaluation of the key risks and
opportunities of the site?
35

In addition to site visits, information on past land or seabed uses may have been collected
through research of historic maps and charts. Site condition reports such as Envirocheck can
summarise a range of previously collected data. Useful sources of background information on site
sensitivities and land condition include Defras Multi-Agency Geographic Information for the
Countryside (MAGIC) website in England (http://magic.defra.gov.uk/), CCW in Wales
(http://www.ccw.gov.uk/default.aspx?lang=en), SNH in Scotland (http://www.snh.gov.uk/) as well
as the Environment Agency (http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/) and SEPAs
(http://www.sepa.org.uk/). The MMO (http://www.marinemanagement.org.uk/) may need to be
consulted for marine and offshore works.
To score fully, the collected information must be systematically analysed to establish the key risks
and opportunities of the site. This may or may not have included attributing scores or weight to
different areas, but understanding the character of the site is key to designing an appropriate
development.
Such a study may result in a different site selection, i.e. the current site may be different from the
original site proposed as a result of this process. To score 35, studies should also include
consideration of current planning policies or resource development policies.
CEEQUAL Ltd
49
Evidence would ideally be in the form a single comprehensive desk study. It may be that
the information is a collation of existing site assessment, investigation and evaluation
reports, such as archaeological, geotechnical reports and data searches. The desk study
will contain information that is relevant to other sections of the CEEQUAL Assessment.
Evidence
Guidance
Alternatively, desk studies could identify issues from previously completed investigations.
It is possible that the EIA could provide some of the information.
Note that to score as comprehensive the reports should, not just geo-environmental
information but a general assessment of the site with regard to engineering, environmental
and planning policies. The report should identify shortfalls in available information.
4.1.3
33 pts
LAND USE EFFICIENCY
Client
Has the land-take of different scheme designs, process designs

and layouts of the planned works been calculated, and have these
calculations influenced the design process and the land-use
efficiency of the final design?
Design
Construct
33

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out for refurbishment projects that do not involve any change to the land take or
seabed use of the facilities to be refurbished, and for projects where the project team
genuinely has no ability to consider land take.
Question
Guidance
Although it is always important to use land efficiently, it is increasingly clear that in certain
circumstances minimising the use of land increases adverse impacts in other areas of
environmental and social concern. For example, in Ireland, there is increasing use of constructed
wetlands for wastewater treatment works. These consume land for the constructed beds, but are
created in such a way that the paths around them can be used for recreation, and the energy
consumption of the works is as low as 6kW total installed capacity, which runs a few hours each
day. This solution trades the use of land for reduced energy consumption and is regarded as a
more-sustainable solution that conventional works when the land and topography suits the need.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence must be provided to demonstrate that specific attention, above normal practice,
has been given to the scheme design with the express intention of enhancing land-take
efficiency.
4.1.4
TEMPORARY LAND USE
4.1.4 a)
9 pts
Client
Has a formal process for selecting temporary land for construction

been employed?
Design
Construct
4.1.4 b)
9 pts
Is there evidence that the construction team has made effective

use of land resources made available to them, and minimised the
long-term adverse impacts of the temporary greenfield land take
during construction?

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out only if the project team can demonstrate that no land is used for temporary
facilities. An example could be an offshore wind farm where all land-based activities use
existing facilities such as factories, roads and ports.
Question
Guidance
Contractors are sometimes left with the responsibility of obtaining additional land for construction
compounds, spoil storage sites and stocking yards. Primarily this will relate to temporary land use,
in particular whether selection and use of site compounds and material storage areas have
considered the environment, and to any efforts made to minimise land take for temporary
compounds and works.
50
CEEQUAL Ltd
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be found in evaluation of options; calculations derived from alternative site
layouts, including identified environmental constraints; comparisons between land made
available to the construction team and land actually used; plans; site guidelines; a method
statement for set-up of the compound; and photographs. Evidence could also cover the
areas of temporary land take that have been avoided to prevent disturbance, such as
cordoning off woodlands or grass verges from the site. Photographs may also provide
evidence of land use.
4.1.5
PREVIOUS USE OF THE SITE

Has the site been previously used for built development?
Design
Construct
23
If un-developed*, score 0.
If >25% previously developed*, score 5.
Or, if refurbishment project, score 23.
23 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Client
Scope out only for marine and offshore projects where there is no use of land on shore.
Construction of civil engineering projects on previously developed sites assists with regeneration,
potentially revitalising local communities and conserving un-developed land (called Greenfield
land or Greenfield sites by many references). Land re-use is in line with government policy,
current thinking on planning, and compatible with the principles of sustainable development.
However, such previously developed sites (called Brownfield or derelict land or sites by many
references), particularly in industrial or urban areas, may also have special ecological and/or
historical interest. They may provide temporary open space that is especially valued in a
neighbourhood and may need to be replaced with permanent open space rather than be
developed. To take account of this, for the purposes of this document, the definitions of the terms
Greenfield and Brownfield have been adapted accordingly, and are given in the guidance
below:
* Terminology:
Greenfield or un-developed sites are defined as those that are essentially covered in
vegetation whether natural or cultivated, with no evidence of substantive recent built
development remaining (although they could encompass sites of archaeological
importance), or where uses have been essentially restricted to agriculture, gardens,
parkland or playing fields.
Integral areas of infrastructure that are green, such as grass verges or embankments
that are included in the project area or site boundary, should be considered in the scoring
and if, for example, they make up 45% of site then score as >50% previously-developed
but not >75%.
Question
Guidance
Previously-developed or Brownfield sites are those that have been used for built
development, and this use is still evident in the form of buildings or structures or their
remains, a significant cover of made ground, or soil or groundwater pollution from
activities conducted on the site. They may or may not be contaminated. Brownfield sites
are sites which, according to the Concerted Action on Brownfield and Economic
Regeneration Network CABERNET (2007):
have been affected by former uses of the site or surrounding land;
are derelict or under-used;
are mainly in fully or partly developed urban areas;
may have real or perceived contamination problems; and/or
require intervention to bring them back to beneficial use.
In respect of development on previously used land, a useful definition is:

Previously-developed land is that which is or was occupied by a permanent structure,
including the curtilage of the developed land and any associated fixed surface
infrastructure.
CEEQUAL Ltd
51
Definitions and exclusions will vary from place to place but some exclusions to previously
developed land to consider are listed below:
Land that is or has been occupied by agricultural or forestry buildings.
Land that has been developed for minerals extraction or waste disposal by landfill
purposes where provision for restoration has been made through development
control procedures.
Land in built-up areas such as parks, recreation grounds and allotments, which,
although it may feature paths, pavilions and other buildings, has not been
previously developed.
Land that was previously developed but where the remains of the permanent
structure or fixed surface structure have blended into the landscape in the
process of time (to the extent that it can reasonably be considered as part of the
natural surroundings).
Hence, if a previously developed (Brownfield) site is being developed that falls under the
above exclusions, then it should be treated as an un-developed (Greenfield) site and
awarded 0 points.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include calculations derived from site layouts or information contained in
the EIA, historic photos and maps. Photographs may also provide evidence of existing
land use.
4.1.6
CONSERVATION OF SOILS & OTHER ON-SITE RESOURCES
19 pts
Client
Design
Construct
Apart from the actual land take, did the site selection and design of
19
the project also take into consideration the conservation of topsoils,
subsoil, seabed surface geology, and conservation or use of onsite mineral resources?
Scope-out
Guidance
The emphasis of this question is on the avoidance of the highest value and/or most productive
soils. Soils can be of high value because of the habitats they support, the role they play in wider
environmental quality, the carbon they contain or simply highly valued in their own right. Lack of
use of soils and minerals due to poor quality of these materials can still score points, but evidence
of this must be presented best use can be the non-use of soils and minerals, which also
minimises the environmental impacts of excavation, transport and/or disposal of the excavated
material.
Guidance on good practice with regard to soils can be found on the Defra website at
www.defra.gov.uk/environment/quality/land/soil/built-environ/ and on the MMO website at
www.marinemanagement.org.uk/.
Question
Guidance
Documents available include:
Construction Code of Practice for the Sustainable Use of Soils on Construction Sites;
Toolbox Talks on a variety of soil related topics;
Safeguarding our Soils: A Strategy for England; and
Details of Marine Protection Areas and Marine Conservation Zones.
The Code of Practice for the Sustainable Use of Soils on Construction Sites in particular provides
guidance on the production of a Soils Resource Plan for the conservation and management
(including re-use) of soil resources.
Note: Further scores are available in Section 8.3 for the preparation and implementation of a soil
management plan and for the re-use of subsoil and topsoil.
Evidence
Guidance
52
Evidence could be in the form of a Soils Resource Plan, documented statements in

appropriate reports or meeting notes about the optimal use of soils.
CEEQUAL Ltd
4.2
Contamination of land and beds of the sea, estuaries, rivers & lakes
Land contaminated with substances that are potentially hazardous owing to their nature or quantities present
and originating from previous uses may need to be treated to protect human health and the environment, and to
enable redevelopment. The nature, distribution and hazards posed by contamination must be assessed on a
site-specific basis.
Seabed contamination for example mine tailings dumped on the shore, spillage or dumping of drilling muds
and sludges, and contaminants put down sea outfalls is rarer than land contamination but can be severe in
particular areas, for example estuaries and harbours. Cleanup of such contamination is more likely to be a
project in its own right rather than an ancillary part of a marine project (such as a jetty or pipeline). However,
those involved in such projects need to consider relevant aspects of this section as they apply to their project
for example a pipeline passing through an area of contaminated seabed. They also need to consider whether
the contamination is actually natural rather than man-made and therefore needs to be worked around rather
than treated.
Hazards often include substances such as heavy metals and hydrocarbons that can pose risks to human health
and the environment including water resources. Other substances can also contaminate sites including
asbestos, biological contaminants, unexploded ordnance as well as hazardous gases.
Hazardous gases and vapours often originate from thick fill or deposits of waste either on or near to the site, or
from coal or other mining activities beneath the site, and may impact on developments. Gases of most concern
are methane, which can be explosive or flammable, and carbon dioxide, which can be toxic and an asphyxiant
through the displacement of oxygen. Both are, in addition, significant greenhouse gases implicated in
triggering global warming and therefore climate change. Other hazardous gases and vapours, such as
hydrogen sulphide, hydrogen cyanide and solvents, could arise from old industrial process sites. Hazardous
gases can also derive naturally from organic deposits such as peat (for example, methane and carbon dioxide)
or rocks such as granite (radon).
Remediation of land for civil engineering projects involves the same processes and technologies as remediation
for other types of use. However, the suitable for use principle indicates that, depending on the type of civil
engineering project, clean-up may not be needed to the standard required for more-sensitive land uses such as
housing or schools.
The principal legislation controlling development of land affected by contamination in the UK is planning
legislation, which requires developers to deal with any contamination as an integral part of a planning
application. Furthermore, Part IIA of the EPA 1990 addresses the issue of how to deal with historical
contamination that may lead to significant harm. It presents a risk-based definition of what legally constitutes
land contamination. The management and reduction of risks posed by contamination are key drivers of current
contaminated land policy and practice. In addition to environmental risk reduction, the sustainability of the
remedial solution selected, the residual environmental risk remaining after remediation, and the durability of the
solution, all need to be considered.
For marine works, the Marine Works (Environmental Impact Assessment) Regulations (2007) will be the
relevant legislation.
$ Questions 4.2.2 to 4.2.7 can be scoped out if no hazardous substances are likely to be present on
site. However, an audit and/or investigation (Question 4.2.1) must have been carried out to establish
this. If an audit or investigation has not been carried out, these questions cannot be scoped out.
Where the questions were scoped out initially and contamination is subsequently discovered and
remediated as part of the project, then the questions will need to be reinstated and scored in the normal
way.
CEEQUAL Ltd
53
4.2.1 (M) CONTAMINATION RISK ASSESSMENT
4.2.1 a)
(M)
10 pts
Was the desk study covered by Question 4.1.2 a formal study

assessing risk and implications that may be associated with the
land or seabed? Did it include issues related to soil, groundwater,
gas, residual man-made structures and surrounding land uses, or
has it been extended into such a suitably formal and detailed
study?
Client
Design
Construct
10

Did the study go beyond the above scoring to provide additional
input to project decision-making:
4.2.1 b)
19 pts
19
If comprehensive information through desk study, site walkover or

subsea survey, and adequacy of information assessed against risk,
score 8.
If the desk study additionally includes visual and descriptive
illustrations of the links between contaminant source, pollution
pathways and receptors on site, score a further 11.
Scope-out
Guidance
Question 4.2.1 b) can be scoped out only if the formal study (normally a Phase 1 Desk
Study in the UK) indicated that these additional studies would be unnecessary or
inappropriate.
This question is addressed once a site has been chosen for the project. A Phase I Desk Study
has to be carried out in order to establish whether there is a potential for a site to be
contaminated. The information identified in the study covered by Question 4.1.2 will be drawn on
but the adequacy of the information may be insufficient to allow confidence in the risk assessment
and more work may need to be undertaken.
Question
Guidance
Physical inspection of the site in a form of a walkover is important in understanding the dynamics
of the site. The walkover and investigation has to be carried out before the design process
commences so that the design can take the results into account.
Note that in some cases, Questions 4.1.2 and 4.2.1 may be answered by the same study it will
depend upon how the project development has been organised and upon the site options
available to the Client.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should include an outline study including a risk assessment of contamination

affecting current and future receptors including consideration of how the outline proposals
will affect any source-pathway-receptor linkages. This is best represented in an outline
conceptual site model.
4.2.2
CONTAMINATED LAND SPECIALISTS
36 pts
If the studies mentioned in Question 4.2.1 have suggested that

contamination may be present on site, has a suitably experienced
chartered contaminated land specialist or even a specialist in land
condition been consulted?
Client
Design
Construct
36
If No, score 0.
If chartered specialist with significant relevant experience,
score 22.
If specialist in land condition, score 36.
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
A specialist in land condition and/or contamination should be a suitably recognised professional,

such as CEng, IEng CGeol, CSci or CEnv and have appropriate relevant professional land
condition experience. SILCs* have to submit for review their relevant experience and are
subject to examination and a review process.
* Specialist in Land Condition - see www.silc.org.uk for details.
54
CEEQUAL Ltd
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include further reports or notes of discussions with a specialist or even a
specialist in land condition verifying the initial findings and where appropriate identifying
strategies to deal with contamination.
4.2.3
LAND CONTAMINATION MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
19 pts
If contamination was present on site, was the site assessed in line

with appropriate local procedures for the management of land
contamination or, where not available, in accordance with other
internationally recognised best practice?
Client
Design
Construct
19
If No, score 0.
If a Report defining risk assessment, score 12.
If a Report evaluating feasible remediation options and determining
the most appropriate remediation strategy for the site, score 19.
Scope-out
Guidance
Model Procedures for the Management of Land Contamination, the UK Environment Agencys
Contaminated Land Report 11 (CLR11) states:
The technical approach presented in the Model Procedures is designed to be applicable to a
range of non-regulatory and regulatory contexts. These include:
Question
Guidance
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
development or redevelopment of land under the planning regime;

regulatory intervention under Part IIA of the Environment Protection Act 1990 or Part
III of the Waste & Contaminated Land (Northern Ireland) Order 1997;
voluntary investigation and remediation; and
managing potential liabilities of those responsible for individual sites or a portfolio of
sites.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of a remediation strategy outlining the methods and values
to be achieved.
4.2.4
EVALUATION OF REMEDIATION OPTIONS

If the site had been contaminated, and remediation was part of the
scope of work being assessed, is there evidence that:
Client
Design
Construct
48
Feasible remediation options were evaluated and the most

appropriate remediation strategy determined for the site as agreed
by an appropriate expert, score 24.
The remedial solution removed or eliminated the need to landfill
and material removed in the remediation was utilised in other
construction projects (other than landfill construction or cover),
score 36.
48 pts
If the remediation options were evaluated and agreed by an

appropriate expert; the selected remedial solution was above the
minimum requirements of the regulatory authority and either used
innovative technology or innovative application of existing
technology*; or increased the potential utility of the project site
beyond the immediate project, score 48.
If none of the above, score 0.
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out if remediation was not part of the scope of work being assessed.
CEEQUAL Ltd
55
Use of soil (bio) treatment centres is welcomed but the product must be put back into the chain of
utility and not simply used to provide cover or construction materials for landfill projects.
*An innovative technology or innovative application is one where, for example:
Question
Guidance
it can be defined as a new application in the UK; and

it will be assessed as part of a CL:AIRE (Contaminated Land: Applications in Real
Environments) demonstration project; or
there is other substantial information such as reported research to demonstrate
innovation.
Which technology is most appropriate will depend on the site conditions, the type and extent of
contamination and the intended use. Dig and encapsulate on site includes cover layers and
vertical barriers such as slurry walls, which can contain, but do not destroy, contaminants.
Cement-based technologies (stabilisation or solidification) can immobilise contaminants for
several decades or longer. Incineration can destroy organic contaminants, but can result in air
emissions and ash residues that need to be landfilled. Vitrification destroys some contaminants
and immobilises others. Physical remedial processes can result in concentrated residues or
transfer of contaminants to an alternative media (for example, soil washing, and soil vapour
extraction).
Some technologies have substantial energy and/or material requirements (such as vitrification), or
may in themselves result in environmental impact or nuisance.
The most sustainable technology from this perspective is probably natural attenuation, but this
requires management of environmental risk over substantial time periods. In each case, the most
sustainable solution should be identified through an appraisal of options.
It should be noted that the remediation of contaminated soils on site might require either an
Environmental Permit or an exemption from the Environmental Permitting Regulations (or the
equivalent license or exemption depending on the geographical location in the UK). Some
remediation activities might also require planning permission. Therefore, evidence will be required
to demonstrate compliance. The management of waste and re-use of materials is covered in
Section 8: Physical Resources Use and Management, but these activities should also be
recorded in the Site Waste Management Plan. In addition activities may be carried out under the
CL:AIRE Definition of Waste: Development Industry Code of Practice Version 2. This Code of
Practice, which is applicable to England and Wales, was initiated to provide a clear and concise
process to determine whether excavated materials on a development site constitute waste in the
first instance, and to identify the point when treated waste can no longer be considered as waste.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could again be in the form of a remediation strategy and action plan, which has
been approved by the Environment Agency, SEPA, NIEA or equivalent. Evidence is also
required of the relevant permits, licenses or exemptions. To score the maximum points the
innovative technology must fit the criteria specified above.
4.2.5
GROUND-GENERATED GASES
If ground-generated gases were present, was there evidence of
risk reduction and management in place and fully implemented*?
34 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Client
Design
Construct
34
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score 14.
If Yes, and design and implementation was not reliant on
management and intervention that was fit and forget,
then score 34.
Scope out if the studies answering Question 4.2.1 show that no ground-generated gases
were present.
* This includes protective measures in the ground and/or in buildings and structures.
Question
Guidance
Protection from hazardous gases can be achieved through creating barriers to prevent migration
into buildings or between sites, or to create preferential pathways through which gases can be
safely vented.
Verification may be required through long-term monitoring of potential pathways or accepted
56
CEEQUAL Ltd
compliance points to ensure no further increase in the levels of contamination (for example from
bounce-back from some remediation processes) and/or confirm reducing pollutant values, which
is a particular requirement for monitored natural attenuation.
Externally verified validation of remediation is often not conducted, and there is still little
information on the long-term performance of many remediation technologies.
Relevant guidance in this area includes:
CIRIA: Assessing risks posed by hazardous ground gases to buildings (C665 2007).
Radon: guidance on protective measures for new buildings, IHS BRE Press, Bracknell,
November 2007 (Ref. BR211).
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence will be likely to include design details and a monitoring plan.
4.2.6
IMPLEMENTATION OF REMEDIAL SOLUTION
22 pts
Is there evidence that the impacts of the implementation of the

remedial solution have been assessed and appropriate control
measures been put in place?
Client
Design
Construct
22

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
All appropriate control measures should have been in place for noise, dust and pollution control
during the remediation phase. For example, for transport of contaminated soil off-site, this would
include wheel washing, sheeting and the provision of relevant documentation. On-site measures
may include fencing off and signposting the contamination, as well as ensuring that no migration
of the contamination is taking place. No significant negative impacts should result from the
remediation process.
Storage of material on site prior to disposal may fall under the relevant waste management
controls and therefore the appropriate permits, licenses or exemptions will be required. The
management of waste is covered in Section 8: Physical Resources Use and Management, but
activities involving the storage and collection of waste should also be recorded in the Site Waste
Management Plan.
Evidence
Guidance
Control measures, monitoring data, regulatory visits and actions and waste disposal
activities should all be documented, and this documentation should be available to
demonstrate that this was the case, for example a Site Waste Management Plan, other site
records (photographic or otherwise), delivery, transfer or consignment notes, or invoices.
4.2.7
LONG-TERM EFFECTIVENESS OF REMEDIAL SOLUTION

Is there evidence that the effectiveness and durability of the
remedial solution, and maintenance and monitoring, have been
considered over the lifetime of the project and beyond, and
operational information conveyed to the operator?
Design
Construct
40
If No, score 0.
If some evidence, score 15.
If evidence is captured in a Validation Report and Operations
Manuals, score 35.
If warranties and insurance are in place in addition to having a
Validation Report and Operations Manuals, score a further 5.
40 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Client
CEEQUAL Ltd
57
Question
Guidance
Evidence should be available regarding the longevity of the remedial solution and normal
maintenance requirements. The projected lifetime of the development must not be greater than
the lifetime of the remedial solution. Long-term monitoring is required to ensure the continued
effectiveness of some solutions, including natural attenuation, permeable reactive barriers, slurry
walls, ongoing process-based treatments for groundwater.
Monitoring arrangements will depend on the type of remediation method chosen and its projected
lifetime. Where monitoring is necessary, there should also be contingency plans in case
monitoring data should demonstrate any fault or deterioration in the remedial solution.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should demonstrate that the remedial solution appropriately meets the
requirements outlined in the guidance above.
4.2.8
PREVENTION OF FUTURE CONTAMINATION
14 pts
Is there evidence that pollution control measures are in place to

prevent any future contamination occurring in relation to the site?
Client
Design
Construct
14

Scope-out
Guidance
The question can be scoped out if no on-site contamination had been identified and
therefore no remediation was necessary, and there is no new or existing use on or near the
site involving any potential contaminants.
This question applies to previous contamination from on or off the site, as well as any possible
contamination resulting from the new use of the site or any other potentially contaminating use
adjacent to the site. How likely this is, how severe any potential contamination would be, and what
kind of preventative measures should have been taken, depends on the nature of the project and
should be assessed accordingly.
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
4.3
For example, in the design of new facilities such as offshore pipelines and oil & gas production
facilities, fuel tanks, waste storage areas, chemical stores or processes that include chemical use,
new infrastructure should be built to current standards to prevent future contamination of ground
and groundwater. Where the subject site has been cleaned up, but the neighbouring site is
potentially contaminated and there is a risk of migration onto the site resulting in recontamination,
evidence should be available to demonstrate that measures have been taken to control the risk.
Evidence could show the implementation of recommendations from any remediation
strategy, including provision of appropriate monitoring facilities. Evidence could be
drawings or photographs showing the installed features.
Flood risk
Any civil engineering project has some flood risk associated with it and may alter the flood risk for others. Flood
risk can originate from a number of sources including fluvial, tidal, groundwater, overland flow and artificial
sources. Consideration should be given during the planning and design of the works to current and future risks
from all of these sources. One of the most common sources of flood risk to the project or elsewhere is
increased surface water run-off.
The central tenet of this sub-section is for Designers first to assess what the flood risks associated with the
project are likely to be once the project is completed, and then to undertake any measures to deal with or to
reduce identified flood risk, whether for the project or elsewhere. It may emerge that no such measures are
needed; hence Question 4.3.1 is marked (M) but Questions 4.3.2, 4.3.3 and 4.3.4 are not.
$ The Flood and Water Management Act 2010 has changed the way in which flood risks are assessed
and managed in the UK. Local authorities are responsible for developing a local flood risk management
strategy to address flooding from all sources that is consistent with the National Strategy. The Act also
establishes a Sustainable Drainage Systems (SuDS) Approving Body (SAB) at county or unitary local
authority levels. The SAB has responsibility for the approval of proposed drainage systems in new
developments and redevelopments, and approval must be given before the developer can commence
construction.
Defras Making Space for Water, PPS25 Development and Flood Risk (even though no longer official policy)
and the NPPF highlight the need to consider flood risk from project concept stage.
58
CEEQUAL Ltd
4.3.1 (M) FLOOD RISK ASSESSMENT
26 pts
Client
Have the run-off, flood risk, and potential increased flood risk
elsewhere as a result of the completed works all been assessed*
over their expected working life, and then appropriate flood
management measures included in the design?
Design
Construct
26

Scope-out
Guidance

* Any assessment has to be in line with the requirements of planning policy guidance or its
equivalent.
Any development, whether or not situated in a floodplain, can contribute to increased flood risk.
Creating additional sealed surfaces on previously open ground will increase run-off, which, if fed
into existing rivers or sewerage systems, adds to the existing load. Climate change has been
predicted to lead to increased rainfall, increased intensities and increased numbers of incidences
of extremely heavy rains, the type of events that cause flooding as a result of sewerage systems
and rivers not being able to cope with the sudden volume of water run-off.
Question
Guidance
The National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF) in England, Technical Advice Note (TAN) 15 in
Wales, and Planning Policy Statement (PPS) 15 in Northern Ireland, and related equivalents,
currently require assessment and appropriate control of run-off. For new developments, run-off
should be controlled such that it is no larger than would be the case from a Greenfield site of the
same size. Increased flood risk elsewhere as a result of the development should be minimised,
and appropriate flood management measures should be included in the design.
Note also that even refurbishment projects may create additional sealed surfaces and a run-off
assessment should be carried out in any case, to ensure that run-off does not exceed the capacity
of existing systems.
Appropriate flood risk management measures could materially affect the overall design of the
project, for example raising the level of a road so that flood risk is reduced, with culverts
incorporated to allow water to flow under it.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence is likely to need to include a review of existing flood risk from all sources that
have the potential to affect the project and a summary of proposed flood management
measures, if deemed required. On certain types of projects, especially small ones for
example small bridges over a river or canal, or strengthening of a river or canal bank a
qualitative assessment may be sufficient evidence. For example, the assessment may have
been made at and recorded in minutes of a design meeting. For risks associated with
surface water run-off, evidence would include assessment or calculations of run-off or, for
larger projects, consultants reports and/or evidence of consultations with appropriate
regulators.
4.3.2
FLOOD-RISK-BASED ENHANCEMENTS
79 pts
Is there evidence that the design team has actively considered

opportunities for providing enhancements as part of the flood risk
management measures and/or the merits of designing for a larger
event or for greater flood resilience than required by planning
regulations or guidance?
Client
Design
Construct
79

Scope-out
Guidance
This question may be scoped out if an appropriate flood risk assessment was carried out
(Question 4.3.1) and did not require any measures to be taken.
Question
Guidance
Opportunities for improving existing or future flood risk conditions can be explored for any project
that has a flood-risk impact. What CEEQUAL defines here as enhancements in a flood-risk
context could be achieved through reducing surface water run-off to rates below those currently
experienced or designing for a greater increase in rainfall intensity due to climate change effects
than the minimum required by regulatory bodies. Designing for larger events or for greater flood
CEEQUAL Ltd
59
resilience may be appropriate for particular sites that are very sensitive to intense rainfall, or runoff from nearby sites, or greater resilience may be appropriate for regional or national strategic
assets such as power stations or grid facilities, water treatment works or wastewater treatment
works.
By reducing surface water run-off beyond current conditions (or beyond the minimum required by
the regulatory bodies), downstream flood risks and flood risks associated with smaller flood
events could be improved. Similarly, designing for a greater increase in rainfall intensity could
improve the whole-life performance of the system and provide more on-site attenuation to cater
for extreme events.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should show what measures (such as the ones mentioned above) have been
incorporated into the design. This could be in the form of drawings, specifications or other
design output documents.
4.3.3
IMPLEMENTATION OF ENHANCEMENT PROPOSALS
Client
Have the proposals recommended in Question 4.3.2 been included

in the design and incorporated in the project?
80 pts
Design
Construct
80
If No, score 0.
For evidence of inclusion in design, score 40.
For evidence that features have been included in the design and
actually incorporated in the project, score 80.
Scope-out
Guidance
This question can be scoped out if an appropriate assessment was carried out to satisfy
Question 4.3.3 and did not require any measures to be taken.
Question
Guidance
See Question 4.3.3.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should show that the measures identified for Question 4.3.2 have been
incorporated into the final works. This could be in the form of drawings, specifications or
other design output documents, and construction records or photographs to demonstrate
their construction.
4.3.4
LONG-TERM FLOOD RESILIENCE & ADAPTATION
79 pts
Is there evidence that the project team has designed for long-term
flood resilience and adaptation?
Client
Design
Construct
79

Scope-out
Guidance
Even when flood risks are taken into consideration during the design of a new development, some
residual flood risk will still exist. This could be a result of an extreme storm event beyond that
considered in Question 4.3.1, breach in flood defences or from overland flow caused by
blockages in the surface water management systems. The potential effects of climate change
could also increase storm intensity to beyond that currently experienced and for which existing
drainage systems are designed.
Question
Guidance
Management of these residual risks can be achieved in a number of ways. For example, new
developments can be built using materials that are suited to inundation, or that can be easily
repaired after a flood event. Electrical installations can be positioned above the line of the
predicted flood level.
Guidance is available in documents such as Improving the flood performance of new buildings
DCLG (2007), Environment Agency Standing Advice and NPPF Technical Guidance in England,
TAN15 in Wales, PPS15 in NI and SPP and PAN 61 in Scotland.
Evidence
Guidance
60
Evidence could be provided in the form of a technical note or drawings that demonstrate
incorporation of measures.
CEEQUAL Ltd
4.4
Basic principles on Landscape Issues
The visual impacts of engineering schemes on their surroundings have long been an issue of concern in the
UK, where the density of development and infrastructure can dominate the small-scale, complex and often
valuable landscape, townscape and seascape settings. Guidance on the evaluation of such effects covers both
the visible effects on the intrinsic qualities and value of the setting and the visual effects on people within that
setting. The general assumption has been that engineering schemes will have an adverse effect on the
appearance of a place. However, the questions in this CEEQUAL Manual allow equally for the assessment of
beneficial effects. In addition, the public realm projects that CEEQUAL also covers, in addition to moretraditional civil engineering, are almost always aimed at improving the landscape and/or townscape.
Landscape Designers will be involved in such public realm projects. In addition, considerable benefits can be
gained from the inclusion of landscape planning and design skills in a civil engineering project from the earliest
stage, to influence the design as well as assessment of issues. Scheme concepts and options are then
developed with best fit into their environment as a key aspect, with concerns being addressed through the
basic form of the proposal and not left for expensive mitigation measures added after decisions have been
made.
Landscapes, townscapes and seascapes of particular value are protected and much has been written about the
characteristics of these areas. The Countryside Agency (now part of Natural England) provided a definition and
description of the many different rural landscape character areas to be found across England, which also
reflects conservation and cultural values. Smaller-scale studies are gradually filling in the detail within these
broad character areas and on the character of towns, as a background to planning policy and other strategies.
General guidance on this topic is available from CIRIAs Open space opportunities for previously developed
land publication (C694, 2011) and from the Open Space website (www.opengreenspace.com).
CABE (the Commission for Architecture and the Built Environment) is part of the Design Council and provides a
design review service for schemes that will have a significant impact on the environment to ensure high quality
design.
Landscape works for land-based civil engineering projects are often implemented by specialist Contractors and
may be designed by consultants. These works usually contain most of the environmental measures included
with a project, such as planting, habitat creation, public space, recreation facilities, screen walls or fences,
interpretation boards, and amenity lighting. They may also have had substantial community involvement in
design development and in aspects of the implementation. These elements will have a significant influence on
the public perception of the scheme as a whole. Construction and maintenance of the landscape works may
continue long after the main engineering elements have been completed and brought into use.
$ It is acknowledged that, for some marine projects, landscape, landscape planning and design will
not be relevant issues. Projects falling into this category of not using any land or affecting important
views or seascapes can therefore scope the whole of Section 3 out (including (M) questions). However,
this applies only to projects where no land-based facilities are used at all, even if only temporarily, such
as for a site compound.
Where a CEEQUAL Award is being applied for, this should be agreed with the Verifier who will then contact
CEEQUAL with the justification and for an amended question set in the Online Assessment Tool.
However, note that for other marine projects, although largely offshore, they will have links to the land (such as
pipeline or cable landfalls). Such land-based parts of such a project need to be assessed under this section.
4.4.1
LANDSCAPE & VISUAL FACTORS
31 pts
Is there evidence that landscape and visual factors have been

considered by a suitably qualified landscape professional at each
stage of the project, including the evaluation of scheme options?
Client
19
Design
Construct
12

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out for marine and offshore projects only if the permanent works involved are out of
sight of land, and there is no use of land, and therefore effects on the landscape, for
temporary works.
Note that temporary construction impacts are assessed in Question 3.4.7.
Question
Guidance
A suitably qualified landscape professional would normally be a Landscape Architect, but could
include a Landscape Manager, Garden Designer, Arboriculturalist or other landscape professional
depending on the nature of the project.
CEEQUAL Ltd
61
Client scores are awarded, for a Whole Team or Client & Design Award, where the brief actively
encourages consideration of landscape and visual factors at each stage. At design stage,
considerations could include siting, massing, colour, texture, materials, earthworks, lighting, street
furniture, planting and relationship with buildings or structures.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include the project brief, a landscape or townscape assessment report,
and comparison of alternatives.
4.4.2
LOCAL LANDSCAPE CHARACTER

Is there evidence that the project design fits the local landscape
character in terms of:
Client
Design
Construct
24
Landform or levels? If Yes, score 4.

Materials? If Yes, score 4.
Planting? If Yes, score 4.
Style and detailing? If Yes, score 4.
Scale? If Yes, score 4.
Landscape or townscape pattern? If Yes, score 4.
If no evidence, score 0.
24 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Scope out for marine and offshore projects only if the permanent works involved are out of
sight of land, and there is no use of land, and therefore effects on the landscape, for
temporary works.
Ideally, any new land-based project should respond to its surroundings and blend in with, or
enhance, the local character. This does not imply that it has to look vernacular. A structure can be
contemporary, yet still reflect local relationships, design elements, colour and material
combinations. The way in which a scheme is set into the landform or townscape surroundings can
have a major influence on its acceptability; appropriate choice is needed of levels, gradients,
profiles, soil stabilisation, and retention. Detailing of walls (for example, regional styles in dry
stone walls), facings, fences, posts, hard surfaces and lighting can respond to area-specific
factors.
The mere planting of indigenous species or same as next door is not sufficient in this context.
Planting should represent or complement the truly local character of the area in terms of
vegetation type and structure (for example, woodland pattern and structure, the form of a
windbreak or shelterbelt, hedgerow character, coppice, designed landscape elements, meadows,
heathland, wetland, urban squares and parks) as well as choice of species and the matching of
species to soil type.
Evidence
Guidance
4.5
Evidence could be in the form of relevant instructions in the brief, or evidence of research
into and understanding of local character all related to the design and completed scheme.
Landscape-related legal requirements
National Parks and Areas of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONBs) are afforded statutory protection under the
National Parks and Access to the Countryside Act 1949. These place strict controls on the extent and types of
work that can be undertaken, with a general presumption against development. Regionally important areas of
landscape, including coastal landscapes and island seascapes, are designated in structure and unitary plans,
with presumption against some forms of development and controls on others. Conservation Areas and Green
belts are defined in the unitary and local plans; Green belts are protected primarily for their openness rather
than any intrinsic landscape qualities but also include a presumption against development.
Planning documents also include policies intended to foster improvement in landscape quality outside the
protected areas, often in association with development and/or with the establishment of community forests.
Heritage Coasts are a non-statutory landscape definition, defined by agreement between relevant maritime
Local Planning Authority and Natural England, and managed so that their natural beauty is conserved, and
visitor accessibility is improved where appropriate. Rights of access on mapped open access land (mountain,
moor, heath, down and registered common land) are provided under the Countryside and Rights of Way Act
2000 (CRoW Act). These areas are subject to exceptions and temporary closures and restrictions, but are
important as areas where the public has the right to roam.
62
CEEQUAL Ltd
Most of the adverse impacts of a project on the landscape or townscape are the direct result of the choice of
location or alignment and can be broadly identified from an early stage. It is therefore important that these
fundamental decisions are made on the basis of appropriate design standards and evaluation of options. Poor
location or alignment can also lead to a cumulative impact with other adjacent facilities, which can be greater
than the sum of its parts. This should lead to some reconsideration of the design, but may not be brought out by
current assessment guidance. It is a particular factor in the gradual erosion of landscape quality in rural and
Green belt areas.
Public access to the landscape, beyond established rights of way, confers its own added value, provided that
this includes consideration of safety and security in design that results in adequate levels of natural
surveillance. Doing so avoids the creation of havens for anti-social behaviour, or publicly accessible areas that
are perceived as unsafe and consequently are not used by the public.
4.5.1
IMPACT ON LANDSCAPE CHARACTER
31 pts
If the project is located in an area of acknowledged and/or

protected high amenity value for its landscape, coastal or
townscape character, has the impact of the development on the
character of the area been assessed?
Client
Design
Construct
31
If a Negative Impact, score 0.

If a Neutral impact, score 12.
If a Positive Impact, score 31.
Scope-out
Guidance
This question can only be scoped out where the project under assessment is not located
in an area of acknowledged and/or protected high amenity value for its landscape or
townscape character.
Question
Guidance
An acknowledged and/or protected high amenity value for its landscape or townscape character
could be an AONB, National Park, Strategic View, Conservation Area (built environment),
Heritage Coast, Registered Park, or landscape identified as being high quality in County
Landscape Character Studies or similar.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence needs to show that local or other statutory authority plans have been viewed to
establish land status. This could be included within the EIA or otherwise shown by a
record on the project file. Evidence for scoping-out should demonstrate that the project is
not within a protected area.
4.5.2
LANDSCAPE DEVELOPMENT POLICIES
11 pts
Client
Do the landscape proposals go beyond the aims of applicable

landscape development or enhancement policies published by the
relevant local, regional or national authority?
Design
Construct
11
Not met, score 0.

Met, score 4.
Beyond, score 11.
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out on projects where there are no landscape works required by planning
conditions or other commitments. Care must be taken here to ensure that landscape works
are not excluded from a contract merely for convenience.
Question
Guidance
Compliance with relevant landscape policies is considered a basic requirement of all schemes;
however, there may be scope for going beyond these basic requirements to provide further
benefit or enhancement.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence of compliance with authority plans and policies could be in the form of a
planning approval. If planning approval is not needed, then evidence of consultation with
relevant authorities would be needed. It will be up to the Assessor and Verifier to agree
how exceedance of requirements is demonstrated.
CEEQUAL Ltd
63
4.5.3
EXISTING VEGETATION
4.5.3 a)
11 pts
Has the condition of existing vegetation* been assessed and has

the retention of vegetation with high or moderate value influenced
design proposals?
Client
Design
Construct
11

Based on this assessment, what percentage of vegetation of high
or moderate quality has been retained as part of the design?
4.5.3 b)
6 pts
4.5.3 c)
5 pts
If retention under 25%, score 0.

If 25% to <50%, score 1.
If 50% to <75%, score 3.
If 75% to 90%, score 5.
If more than 90%, score as indicated.
Is there evidence that vegetation (including root protection areas)
to be retained as part of the design has been adequately protected
during construction?

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out only if no substantial vegetation is present on site (including temporary areas
such as construction compounds).
* In a UK context, vegetation includes trees, hedgerows, special grasses, and reedbeds.
Vegetation, and in the UK and Ireland especially trees, forms an important part of the landscape.
The landscape value of existing vegetation should be considered in the context of development.
Some guidance on the value of trees is included in BS 5837: 2005 Trees in Relation to
Construction.
Question
Guidance
Significant vegetation, and trees protected by a Tree Preservation Order (TPO), would normally
be considered valuable landscape features. However, it is important to consider that size and
protection are not the only factors to determine landscape value, for example small windswept
trees may form interesting features in exposed coastal locations and groups of small trees may
provide an important screening function. Therefore evidence must demonstrate that a strategy for
retention of trees has been developed based on their value in the context of the development.
Vintage trees and ancient woodland even if not formally recognised in any local plan must be
considered as significant.
BS 5837: 2005 also provides guidance on protection of trees during construction.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include arboricultural reports, survey data, tree constraints plan, tree
retention strategy, method statement, photographs, records of site visit(s) during
construction, monitoring of protection measures, or a site visit to the completed scheme.
4.5.4
NON-VEGETATION FEATURES
Has the landscape and amenity value of other features (not
vegetation) been assessed and has the retention of valuable,
distinctive or historic features influenced design proposals?
21 pts
Client
Design
Construct
21
If No, score 0.
If Yes, but negative impact, score 9.
If Yes, neutral impact or avoided, score 13.
If Yes, enhanced setting, score 21.
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out on marine projects where there are no landscape features or views to be lost.
Question
Guidance
Retention of trees is considered in Question 6.2.2. Other landscape features include vegetation
(such as shrubs and hedgerows, meadows or scrubland) topography, rocks, boulders, ponds,
brooks, swamps, wetland areas, parks, plazas, squares, views and vistas. The last five items are
of particular importance in urban areas.
64
CEEQUAL Ltd
Evidence
Guidance
4.6
Evidence could be in the form of a landscape constraints plan, comparison of drawings or

photomontages showing change of land use and new landscape features. What is seen as
enhancement may be a matter of judgement and agreement between Assessor and
Verifier.
Implementation and management
There is some concern amongst Clients that the quality of implementation of landscape works has declined
noticeably, due to the changes in project control brought about by the increased use of Design & Build and
related forms of procurement. This may lead to an increase in the level of prescription provided in the contract
specifications. Inclusion of an Environmental Management System (EMS) and its related detail in the
Landscape Management Strategy (LMS) or Landscape Works Plan (LWP) or equivalent should both help to
counter this downward trend. If a SEMP or equivalent is drawn up to manage the environmental aspects of the
construction work, this should include a section on landscape, which can then be considered equivalent to an
LMS or an LWP. However, this will only work if sufficient means of control are built into the contract and carried
through into implementation.
In addition to good environmental practice relating to landscape works, the development of the project through
the design and implementation stages needs to acknowledge the importance of safeguarding existing
landscape features, and maintaining suitable growing conditions in areas where future establishment of plants
and habitat is proposed.
4.6.1
21 pts
LANDSCAPE DESIGN PROPOSALS
Client
Design
Was a system or plan implemented during the construction period

to ensure that:
planning and third party commitments were implemented;
best practice was applied for planting or habitat areas to
avoid damage to landscape features; and
ensure that soil conditions met the requirements for
successful establishment of the landscape design?
Construct
21
If No, score 0.
If plan prepared, score 17.
If plan then implemented, score 21.
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out for marine and offshore projects only if the permanent works involve no use of
land, and therefore no opportunities for landscape works, even for temporary works.
Question
Guidance
Civil engineering work can cause damage to landscape features. A system or plan should be in
place to ensure that such effects are avoided or mitigated. It should allocate responsibility for
control measures and establish procedures for monitoring and reviewing the effectiveness of the
system or plan. Mechanisms for ensuring that commitments made during the planning process, to
statutory bodies or third parties are implemented, should also be included in the system or plan.
The plan must be in place early enough to permit implementation from the start of work on site
and should be reviewed on a regular basis throughout the implementation of the project.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include a LMS, LWP or equivalent section in a SEMP. Evidence of

consultation with relevant statutory bodies and other relevant third parties should be
included in the plan.
4.6.2
ADVANCE LANDSCAPE WORKS
31 pts
Have opportunities for advance landscape works been considered,

such as planting prior to construction?
Client
19
Design
Construct
12

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out for marine and offshore projects only if the permanent works involve no use of
land, and therefore no opportunities for landscape works, even for temporary works; or on
Construction Awards where the Contractor genuinely had no opportunity to influence any
advance works.
CEEQUAL Ltd
65
Question
Guidance
Advance landscape works would normally consist of planting to provide structure to a

development, screening of views or early impact, but may equally include construction of
earthworks or other landscape features to fulfil a landscape function such as screening.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should include documented evidence that advance landscape works have been
considered, even if the possibility of implementation has been ruled out.
4.6.3
APPROPRIATENESS OF SPECIES SELECTED
31 pts
Has planting design taken the appropriateness of species selection

into account to include factors such as climate adaptation, local
provenance and soil stability?
Client
Design
Construct
31

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out only on projects where no planting works are possible or on Construction
Awards where the Contractor genuinely had no opportunity to influence the landscaping
design.
Question
Guidance
Species selection is an important consideration for planting works. The appropriateness of certain
species will depend on the nature of the development. Ornamental and architectural planting
schemes may be appropriate for urban or commercial developments, but are unlikely to be
appropriate for rural schemes. Local provenance is often regarded as important for native planting
schemes but may not be appropriate for climate change adaptation. The landscape design should
be supported by evidence that factors determining species selection have been considered and
that the most relevant factors have been used to develop the criteria for planting design.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include a review of the criteria used to determine plant selection.
4.7
Completion and aftercare
Aftercare of landscape schemes can be as important for their success as good design and implementation. This
is particularly the case for schemes that incorporate wild flowers and/or herbaceous planting, which aim to
create a diverse flora over time, or establish conditions suitable for a particular species, group of species, or
generally to enhance biodiversity. Public perception of amenity planting schemes is too often let down by an
untidy and uncared for appearance, or by planting or habitat creation schemes not developing their full potential
due to lack of appropriate management and maintenance. Soft landscape schemes are dynamic in nature and
require monitoring and review of objectives in response to changing conditions over time. It is important that the
level of management, monitoring and review of objectives is appropriate for the type of planting or habitats
involved. Maintenance of hard landscape elements should not be overlooked.
4.7.1
4.7.1 a)
21 pts
LONG-TERM MANAGEMENT PLAN

Has a management plan been developed that:
defines long-term landscape objectives,
establishes recommendations for work required to ensure
that objectives are achieved, and
sets a programme for ongoing monitoring and review to
assess the effectiveness of maintenance operations?
Client
17
Design
Construct
66
CEEQUAL Ltd
4.7.1 b)
21 pts
Is there evidence that:

responsibility for the implementation of the management
plan has been allocated to an appropriate individual or
organisation;
that appropriate skills and resources (including financial)
are committed; and
that a programme of monitoring is in place beyond the
normal planting establishment period?
21

Scope-out
Guidance
These questions may be scoped out only on projects where there was no opportunity or
scope for planting works such as marine and offshore projects with no land connection. In
these cases, the Assessor and Verifier should establish and agree whether there was
genuinely no opportunity.
The Management Plan can either have been prepared as part of the Landscape Management
Strategy or Landscape Works Plan, or can be a separate document (for example a Landscape
Management Plan).
Question
Guidance
The programme or plan should include detailed descriptions of any maintenance tasks that have
to be carried out on a regular basis (for example, grass to be cut to a particular height, grass
cuttings left or collected, selective tree-felling or pruning, further planting) including an indication
of frequency (for example once a fortnight, once a year, every six years) and, where applicable,
time (for example, for meadows the right timing of cuts is crucial). Hard landscape maintenance
tasks should be included where appropriate (for example, graffiti and chewing gum to be removed
from hard surfaces).
Note that the review programme or plan needs to go significantly beyond the normal maintenance
carried out during a planting establishment period (often three to five years).
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should be in the form of a plan covering landscape management objectives and
measures, together with evidence that the responsibility for long-term maintenance has
been allocated and resourced appropriately.
CEEQUAL Ltd
67
Section 5: The Historic Environment
5. THE HISTORIC ENVIRONMENT

The landscape rural, urban and maritime demonstrates thousands of years of human activity and can be
referred to in physical terms as the historic environment. The historic environment comprises those buildings,
structures and other features surviving in the current landscape, townscape and seascape as evidence for how
mankind has shaped and managed our environment (the historic landscape character) over past centuries and
millennia. Included in the term historic environment is the wealth of now-buried and often-invisible evidence that
has been created and then buried below the existing ground levels both onshore, within the inter-tidal zone and
offshore this is referred to as the archaeological and marine heritage. Archaeological heritage contains
much diversity, and significance is attached to all kinds of evidence, ranging from Palaeolithic scatters of flint
artefacts some 500,000 years old through to Roman Villas buried below ploughed fields, to evidence both
buried and visible for the industrial and military archaeology of the 20th Century. Marine heritage comprises
not only historic wrecks but also a diverse range of maritime buildings, buried landscapes and other marine
historic features (such as fish weirs).
The basic principles that are currently applied to the protection, conservation and enhancement of the historic
environment by EU governments derive from the understanding that the constituent parts are a non-renewable
resource that not only provides an essential educational and academic resource for humankinds development,
but also an historical context and framework for new development. The public and economic values of heritage
preservation and guidance on what legislation and administration systems nation states should put in place are
described in several European conventions and charters (Convention for the Protection of the Architectural
Heritage of Europe, 1985; Charter for the Protection and Management of the Archaeological Heritage, 1992;
European Landscape Convention, 2000).
Certain historic assets are protected by UK legislation or international convention (these are referred to as
registered assets; for example listed buildings, scheduled monuments and certain landscapes). A great deal of
the historic environment may not be specifically protected by legislation but may be afforded consideration
through the planning consents regime. Careful planning and working to professional standards and guidance is
essential in developing projects that take full account of non-registered assets to identify their significance, and
the opportunities these assets present to develop a truly sustainable historic environment.
Frequently, the surviving historic environment is fragile and highly susceptible to damage and destruction; its
significance is also not always easy to recognise. The historic environment also has an inherent capability to
provide new knowledge, create a valuable sense of place and contribute to education and community
outcomes. Therefore, evidence for the process of professional appraisal and assessment, coupled with key
consultations, is essential to achieving high scores in this section. Projects should recognise that basic
compliance with legal consents and planning conditions for all types of heritage assets is a minimum. Projects
assessed under CEEQUAL should be aiming to exceed the minimum requirement and develop innovative and
valuable opportunities to enhance historic environment assets and develop knowledge and understanding.
The principles for managing development impacts on the historic environment in the planning process are
encapsulated in the relevant national heritage legislation and in the UK through national and local planning
policy guidance.
In the UK and Ireland, the national heritage agencies (i.e. English Heritage in England, CADW in Wales (the
Welsh Governments historic environment service), Historic Scotland in Scotland, the Northern Ireland
Environment Agency in Northern Ireland, and the Department for Environment, Heritage and Local
Government in Ireland) issue regular advice and specific guidance on historic environment matters in the
planning system. Advice and guidance can also be found at local government level and the majority of local
governments apply specific local policies and guidance to works affecting the historic environment in their
areas.
The English Heritage website (www.helm.org.uk) is a useful gateway providing guidance documents and case
studies for all types of historic environment issues
A summary for the UK and links to useful websites can be found in CIRIA report Archaeology and Development
a good practice guide to managing risk and maximising benefit (C672, 2008). Specific sectors issue their own
guidance for application on government funded development such as the Highways Agency Design Manual for
Roads and Bridges (DMRB) and the National Roads Authority in Ireland.
Standards and guidance are also issued by the various professional standards institutions such as Institute for
Archaeologists (IFA), the Institute of Historic Building Conservation (IHBC) and, in Ireland, the Institute of
Archaeologists of Ireland.
Assessing performance for CEEQUAL focuses on gaining an understanding of the following areas:
68
CEEQUAL Ltd
Have the baseline conditions been properly assessed and documented, combined with effective
consultation and application for consents? (Sections 5.1 and 5.2)
Has the design fully incorporated the constraints and opportunities? (Section 5.3)
Has a mitigation strategy been prepared and consulted on? Has the mitigation been successfully
implemented and monitored? (Section 5.3)
Have the results of any mitigation works and monitoring been fully reported on, disseminated for public
access and archived? (Section 5.4)
$ It may be appropriate to scope out the majority of questions within this section if no historic assets
are identified in Section 5.1 Question 5.1.1 cannot be scoped out and is thus marked (M). Section 5.4
cannot be scoped out unless Section 5.3 has been scoped out.
Where the questions were scoped out initially and archaeology is subsequently discovered during the
project, then the questions will need to be reinstated and scored in the normal way.
5.1
Baseline studies
The project should demonstrate that a formal process has been followed to establish the baseline conditions at
the site(s) and establish through desk study and field surveys, the value and significance of the various
historical assets that may be present. This should reflect the broad classes of historic environment significance
represented by buildings and other structures, historic landscapes, archaeological buried deposits, and marine
heritage sites if offshore works are anticipated.
5.1.1 (M) BASELINE STUDIES AND SURVEYS
5.1.1 a)
(M)
9 pts
Design
Construct
Has a baseline historic environment study or survey been carried

9
out at the project planning stage? And has it considered the full
range of registered and non-registered historic environment assets
including:
(i) historic built heritage, score 1.
(ii) historic landscape/townscape/seascape, score 1.
(iii) below-ground and/or underwater archaeological remains
(on or off shore), score 1.
(iv) non-registered or non-designated assets, score 3.
(v) reference to existing characterisation studies and/or
regional research agendas, score 3.
If No, score 0.
Has the baseline study or survey been:
14
(i) prepared or authorised by a suitably qualified* historic

environment professional? If Yes, score 6.
(ii) prepared to a recognised standard** appropriate to the
scope and location of the project? If Yes, score 8.
If No, score 0.
5.1.1 b)
(M)
14 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Client

* Suitably qualified may be indicated by being a member of a professional heritage body such as
the Institute of Historic Building Conservation (IHBC) or the Institute of Archaeologists (IFA).
Additionally it is expected that the qualified person will hold a relevant historic, conservation or
archaeology degree level qualification. Note that a general environmental management
qualification is not considered sufficient.
Question
Guidance
** A recognised standard may be those published by the national heritage agencies or other
bodies specific to the work being undertaken. IFA have a range of standards and guidance
suitable for different situations, for example IFA Standard and Guidance for Desk-based
Assessment 2001.
It is important that historic environment interests are identified at a pre-design stage and those
significant related issues are incorporated into the design and planning of the project. Best
practice (and the NPPF in England) requires that sufficient surveys (desk study and site-based
investigations as appropriate) are carried out before design works are substantially complete, in
order to determine the extent, nature and significance of any archaeological resource and/or
historic structures, and to consider the significance of any impact.
CEEQUAL Ltd
69
The results of these surveys should (where significant) be shown to have influenced the design as
submitted for planning and have led to options for alterations at the detailed design stage to be
set out.
The baseline should identify what outline mitigation proposals should be developed and
implemented, and adequate time and resources needs to have been allocated in the project
design.
Guidance on appropriate levels of investigation can be found in planning policy guidance (such as
the PPS5 Practice Guide in England) and other guidance such as www.helm.org.uk, the
Highways Agencys Design Manual for Roads and Bridges (Volumes 10 and 11), and CIRIA
Archaeology and Development a good practice guide to managing risk and maximising benefit
(C672, 2008). Note that although PPS5 has been withdrawn by the UK Government the PPS5
Practice Guide remains current. The basic principles are as follows:
Initial appraisal: Undertake sufficient preliminary desk studies to identify all significant
historic environment constraints and opportunities associated with the project.
Assessment and reconnaissance: Assess the likely impact of development options on
identified or potential assets through for example application of reconnaissance surveys,
detailed desk-based assessment, and/or historic buildings assessment. This information
should be used to focus the design options early on to minimize harm to the historic
environment and create opportunities for positive enhancement. Field surveys and the
techniques used should be recorded.
Site evaluation: Depending on the level of archaeological or historical significance
identified, this stage may include site specific targeted surveys to evaluate the extent and
significance of buried archaeological remains, or undertake intrusive investigation on
standing structures to determine suitability for conversion, alteration or protection
measures.
Evidence may be in the form of stand-alone desk based assessments and other survey
reports and/or a chapter in an Environmental Statement or other supporting documents or
correspondence with local development control office for archaeology and conservation.
Evidence
Guidance
Note that this section of CEEQUAL covers both below-ground and above-ground historic
assets, so any evidence must include a summary of the baseline for all types of potential
constraints and opportunities that may be significant. Typical headings may comprise
archaeological remains, built heritage assets setting and townscape, historic landscape
and seascape (if applicable). Evidence needs to show that a specialist has been consulted
during the design option phase to ensure the proposed designs have taken account of
historic environment constraints and opportunities. This could be a formal report from the
specialist or notes of a meeting with them.
A nil return from a regional Historic Environment Record National Monuments Register
database or a generic environmental constraints type report (such as Landmark
Envirocheck report) are not considered alone appropriate evidence to scope out this
question.
5.2
Legal requirements, planning guidance and consultation
A review should be undertaken to establish that the project has been developed and designed with reference to
the applicable legislative and planning guidance and that sufficient consultation with national and local bodies
had been completed at the correct project stage(s).
5.2.1
STATUTORY CONSENTS
Have the relevant statutory consents been sought, approved and
complied with at all project stages?
5 pts
70
Client
Design
Construct
If No, score 0.
If statutory consents have been applied for and approved, score 2.
If they have also been complied with and there were no
non-compliance issues in construction, score 5.
CEEQUAL Ltd
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out only on projects where it can be demonstrated that the project did not involve
any impact on registered assets requiring consents. Note that failure to score against this
question may affect the final Award grade if there has been a legal non-compliance.
Question
Guidance
Note that the construction stage planning and implementation is covered in Question 5.3.6.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence is likely to include application documentation, responses from national heritage

agencies and evidence of monitoring at implementation stage, or notes from meetings.
5.2.2
CONSULTATION
Client
Have the relevant consultations been carried out with:
Design
Construct
12
(i) local government? If Yes, score 1.

(ii) national government agency*? If Yes, score 1.
(iii) Statutory Amenity Societies**? If Yes, score 2.
(iv) other voluntary consultations with local and amateur public
organisations? If Yes, score 2.
(v) If these consultations were conducted prior to planning
application submission or approval, score a further 6.
If No for any of the above, score 0.
12 pts
The whole question can be scoped out on projects where it can be demonstrated that there
were no significant changes to the historic environment. * Part (ii) may be scored where
Scope-out the national heritage agency has been asked but did not need to be formally consulted by
Guidance way of deference to local government duties. **Part (iii) may be scored where it can be
demonstrated that the project scope is not covered by the remit of any Statutory Amenity
Societies.
Statutory Amenity Societies include members of the Joint Committee of the National Amenity
Societies in England and Wales (the Council for British Archaeology, the Ancient Monuments
Society, the Civic Trust, the Garden History Society, the Georgian Group, the Society for the
Protection of Ancient Buildings, the Victorian Society, and the 20th Century Society) and the
Scottish Civic Trust and Scottish Architectural Heritage Society in Scotland.
Question
Guidance
These bodies should be consulted on applications that affect listed buildings, Registered Parks
and Gardens or (currently) Scheduled Monuments. The UK Government directed in the 1968
Town and Country Planning Act that all applications for consent to demolish listed buildings in
whole or in part in England and Wales should be notified to a number of named societies, giving
the societies the opportunity to offer comments on the proposals. The Garden History Society
comments on proposals affecting Registered Parks and Gardens.
Voluntary consultation with other local and amateur organisations demonstrates a commitment to
public engagement and identifying additional local knowledge, concerns and possible positive
enhancements to the historic environment. Consultation should be done as early as practicable so
that guidance or advice can be properly taken into account in the design. It is also likely to
continue into construction on some larger schemes. However, points may be scored by the Client,
the Designer or the Contractor, depending on which organisation is best placed to deal with this
issue.
Evidence
Guidance
5.3
Evidence may be summarised in a section of the documents reviewed at Question 5.1.1 or

be contained in correspondence and/or meeting notes with the relevant consultees.
Conservation and enhancement
If feasible, the design should have sufficient flexibility to consider the conservation and incorporation of historic
environment assets into the project. Sympathetic re-development of existing structures can provide positive
enhancement. The design should minimise the adverse impact of the development on historic assets, and
consider sympathetic re-use of buildings, features such as street furniture, and the use of local materials.
An Historic Environment Works Management Plan (or an equivalent section in an Integrated Project or Site
Environmental Management Plan) should be produced if there are any historic-environment aspects to the site
or its vicinity, whether required by the local authority or other consultee or not.
CEEQUAL Ltd
71
If a report on the archaeological or historic environment recording work carried out has been produced, it should
be available to the public. Furthermore, there should be active publicity for this report to ensure the public
knows about it.
Relevant specialists should be consulted at the earliest design stage to identify both constraints and
opportunities for the project and wider historic environment. The assessment may need to consider belowground and above-ground issues separately.
5.3.1
LISTED OR REGISTERED HERITAGE ASSETS
Client
If statutory listed or registered heritage assets* have been identified

7
within the development area in Question 5.1.1, has:
5.3.1 a)
14 pts
Design
Construct
(i) the project design enabled their retention, restoration and

successful re-use or integration into the development?
If Yes, score 7.
(ii) a future management strategy been agreed?
If Yes, score 7.
If neither, score 0.
5.3.1 b)
16 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Has the methodology in Question 5.3.1 a) been successfully

extended to include non-registered assets**?
16
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score as indicated.
Scope out only if statutory listed or registered heritage assets* have not been identified
within the development area in Question 5.1.1.
*Currently identified as Listed Buildings, Scheduled Monuments, Registered Parks and Gardens,
and Registered Battlefields.
**Non-registered assets may be equally significant. Retention, reuse and enhancement of nonregistered assets should also be considered.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should show that the issues have been recognised and design solutions been
found, and that specific specialist studies to address urban design and setting issues
and/or historic views have been conducted if necessary. Evidence could also include
agreements with the development control conservation team and or national heritage body
in the form of correspondence and/or meeting notes.
5.3.2
SETTING FOR LISTED AND REGISTERED ASSETS
14 pts
Has the design successfully addressed any setting issues and

provided a neutral or enhanced setting for listed buildings,
scheduled monuments or historic landscape areas?
Client
Design
Construct
14
If No, score 0.
If neutral, score 10.
If enhanced, score 14.
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
The design must demonstrate that specific measures have been agreed with the relevant
development control conservation team or national heritage body to integrate the design
successfully with the existing character of the place. Points may be scored by the Client, Design
and/or Contractor provided that it is done during the design stage.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should show that the issues have been recognised and design solutions been
found, and that specific specialist studies to address urban design and setting issues
and/or historic views have been conducted if necessary. Evidence could also include
agreements with the development control conservation team and/or national heritage
agency in the form of correspondence and/or meeting notes.
72
CEEQUAL Ltd
5.3.3
5.3.3 a)
14 pts
ARCHAEOLOGICAL REMAINS
Client
Design
Construct
If the potential for significant* below-ground archaeological remains

14
has been identified in Question 5.1.1, have the appropriate staged
surveys been undertaken to establish the extent and condition of
these prior to the design being finalised?
If surveys were not undertaken in time to influence designs,
score 0.
If they have been, score as indicated.
5.3.3 b)
12 pts
If the surveys identified in Question 5.3.3 a) above have revealed

12
the presence of significant archaeological remains, has a mitigation
strategy document been prepared for archaeological investigation
and agreed with the relevant development control archaeologist?
If No, score 0. If Yes, score 6.
If it contains an element of preservation in-situ of archaeological
remains, score a further 6.
If registered or non-registered historic environment assets have
been demolished or removed, has an appropriate mitigation design
been developed and agreed with the relevant conservation or
heritage agency? (This may include proposals for relocation,
restoration or replacement, or in-situ building recording.)
If No, score 0.
a) If building recording has taken place, score 5.
b) If any historic materials have been salvaged for re-use in
another historic context, score 7.
c) If an asset has been relocated off site to an appropriate
place, score 9.
d) If an asset has been re-sited within the site, score 14.
If a mixture of b)+d) or c)+d), score 11.
5.3.3 c)
14 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
14
*Significant archaeological remains are those that are assessed to be of more than local
importance in the evidence set out in Question 5.1.1 and/or those that are of exceptional
importance locally and may be identified as such in local planning policy and regional and national
research agendas.
The surveys mentioned in Question 5.3.3 a) may include both non-intrusive and intrusive methods
as identified in CIRIA Archaeology and Development a good practice guide to managing risk
and maximising benefit (C672, 2008).
Note that implementation is covered in Question 5.3.4.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence for Questions 5.3.3 a) b) and c): it should be established how the project has
positively protected any historic environment assets, how good design has enhanced and
valued the historic environment, how any innovative methods or collaborations have
enabled the conservation of historic environment assets, and how any archaeological
investigation or building recording have contributed to local and national research
agendas. Evidence may include conservation management plans, mitigation design
reports, evidence of partnership with owners and/or regulators, correspondence, meetings
notes, use of research agendas and, for larger projects, preparation of specific research
strategies or frameworks.
Evidence in Question 5.3.3 a) must demonstrate that the staged surveys were
commissioned by the Client or Designer and their reports delivered prior to the finalisation
of the design.
CEEQUAL Ltd
73
5.3.4
MITIGATION OF IMPACTS ON ARCHAEOLOGICAL REMAINS
5.3.4 a)
14 pts
Is there evidence that the mitigation designs referred to in

Questions 5.3.3 b) and 5.3.3 c) have been implemented, managed
and monitored in accordance with a SEMP or other site
management framework?
Client
Design
Construct
14
5.3.4 b)
14 pts
Have sensitive assets to be retained been cordoned off or other

protection measures put in place to avoid accidental damage and
have site staff received appropriate instruction (such as via toolbox
talks)?
14
If No, score 0.
If protective measures put in place, score 8.
If specific tool-box talks have also taken place, score a further 6.
5.3.4 c)
11 pts
Has an appropriate historical environment professional

(archaeologist, conservation architect or historic buildings
specialist) been appointed to manage and monitor the mitigation
works?
11

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of registers for site briefings and associated attendance
sheets, signed site instructions, Permits to Dig with note of required archaeological or
building recording works prior to demolition and completion certificates, photographic
evidence or drawings showing protection measures. Evidence needs to be appropriate to
the level of points being sought.
Evidence should be provided that mitigation works have been managed and monitored by
a qualified person.
5.3.5
APPROPRIATE MATERIALS AND SPECIALIST SKILLS
5.3.5 a)
9 pts
If restoration or enhancement works to heritage assets have been

completed, is there evidence that current best practice has been
applied and historically appropriate materials used?
Client
Design
Construct

5.3.5 b)
9 pts
Has the project been able to contribute to maintaining key

specialist conservation skills and creating sustainable heritage
employment?

Scope-out
Guidance
Question 5.3.5 a) can be scoped out if the evidence demonstrates that there has been no
restoration or enhancement works to heritage assets. No specific guidance for Question
5.3.5 b). The decision by the Assessor and Verifier on whether to scope out this question
will depend on the nature, scale, location and context of the project.
Question
Guidance
It is acknowledged that the most appropriate material for an historic structure may not necessarily
be the best material from an environmental point of view. For instance, the material may have to
be transported a long distance even though a more-local, but less historically appropriate,
material might be available. A balance has to be struck between historically appropriate
refurbishment and environmental considerations, and the decision will depend on the emphasis
given to the project by the stakeholders and the importance of the historical feature. However, an
informed decision can only be made if an assessment of this issue has been carried out by the
project.
74
CEEQUAL Ltd
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of a design report or notes assessing the different material
options (including those that are historically appropriate). If the use of appropriate
materials were considered feasible then evidence of details being incorporated into the
specifications would be appropriate. Evidence is likely to include documentation of
consultation with relevant expert organisations, and/or receipts of material purchase. If the
materials have actually been used, then photographs could also be used as evidence.
Maintaining specific heritage conservation skills is an important aspect of restoration and
enhancement works evidence could include specifications, training records, and meeting
minutes
5.4
Information dissemination and public access
For an archaeological excavation or building recording project, there is a mandatory requirement under the
terms of most consent regimes and planning determinations to provide professional, academic-related outputs
on the results of investigations and recording the project. Where archaeological remains or an historic building
have been removed or demolished, the written and drawn record (and other media) is the key output of the
agreed mitigation works. The resulting analysis and presentation of the results should be described in a final
project reports(s) and when complete, may be disseminated in a published format or other media. A project
archive should be prepared that meets professional standards; the location and contents of the archive should
be documented.
5.4.1
5.4.1 a)
16 pts
REPORTING
Client
Have the reports and archives from the baseline studies stage
been prepared and submitted before the end of construction?
Design
Construct
16
5.4.1 b)
18 pts
Has the final output* from the mitigation works (such as

archaeological excavation or building recording works) been
prepared and archives submitted?
18
If in preparation by end of construction stage, score 5.

If completed by end of construction stage, score 18.
This question can be scoped out only where there has been no archaeology or historic
buildings work undertaken for the project, including any formal output from Question 5.1.1.
Scope-out
Guidance
Question 5.4.1 a) should only be scoped out where there was no work undertaken. Where
documents have been prepared at Question 5.1.1 but no work has progressed from them,
desk-based assessments should in any case be provided to the relevant local government
Historic Environment Record (HER). Question 5.4.1 b) can be scoped out if the project
does not require a formal post-excavation phase or building recording reports completing.
* Final outputs may comprise historic building recording records, archaeological fieldwork reports,
or laboratory-based analytical reports, texts and figures for publication.
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
Where original baseline historic environment study or survey documents have been prepared in
Question 5.1.1 but no work has progressed from then, 16 points can be scored in Question 5.4.1
a) for submitting the information gained from the studies (such as desk-based assessments) to
the relevant local government HER. For Question 5.4.1 b) where post-excavation analysis or
building recording reporting is carried out, then 18 points can only be scored if they are completed
by the time construction of the project is complete. Score 5 points if the post-excavation analysis
or building recording reporting has commenced and is in preparation, but is not complete at the
end of the construction stage.
Evidence will include a project design for post excavation assessment and analysis,
details of proposed or completed publications (journal articles, books and monographs),
details of archives prepared and submitted (to local museums or to digital online archives).
Evidence needs to be provided to support the level of points being scored. There should
be evidence that the project design has been reviewed and accepted by the relevant
heritage agency and/or funding body.
CEEQUAL Ltd
75
5.4.2
PUBLIC LEARNING
Client
Has there been any public opportunity provided to learn about,

observe or take part in any activity to understand or promote the
historic environment local to the project?
15 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Design
Construct
15
a) If none at all, score 0.

b) If information board on site only, score 2.
c) If leaflets printed or other active publicity such as webbased information or media interest, score a further 2.
d) If educational activities carried out with the local
community, or local voluntary organisations invited to
participate in assessment or mitigation works,
score a further 5.
e) If access to sites to view finds or other activity to
participate in offsite events score a further 6.
This question may not be scoped out where any scores have been made in Section 5.3.
A project may involve an extensive and visible archaeological excavation, and/or the dismantling,
refurbishment or restoration of an historic feature. There is often a high level of public interest in
these issues and value may be generated by the project through public access to the site or by
publicity materials such as providing site visits and information boards. It may also be generated
through involving amateur and local interest groups in surveys, publications, or in producing other
media such as leaflets (or web based material).
Question
Guidance
The project may also be able to contribute to local education objectives through providing site
visits, talks (to schools and local groups) and materials for curriculum activities. Communication
with the public may also be achieved by liaison with the media and museum exhibitions.
The possibility of allowing members of the public, via their local historical or archaeological
societies, access to view the site or to contribute to desk based or field based activities should be
considered. This will help to maintain relations with the local community provide positive public
relations and held meet historic environment objective to communicate new knowledge about the
past. The access can be at a specified time outside operating hours, although a member of the
site management team will have to be present. Alternatively, it can be in an area partitioned off
from the rest of the site, or visits can be arranged in guided groups.
Evidence
Guidance
76
Evidence must be provided to demonstrate the level of public access that was achieved.
This could be in the form of visitors books, press advertisements of access and/or tour
times on site, or photographs of public events or information boards provided off site.
CEEQUAL Ltd
Section 6: Ecology and Biodiversity
6. ECOLOGY AND BIODIVERSITY

6.1
Basic principles
There is concern amongst society in general, and nature conservation organisations in particular, that wildlife
habitats, and the species that occupy them, are continuously being damaged, destroyed and fragmented. This
applies to marine species as much to birds and land-based animals and plants. New development, whether on
land or in the sea, is often cited as one of the reasons for this damage.
However, land-based development and civil engineering projects in particular need not have a negative
impact on biodiversity and wildlife. There are many occasions when careful planning and implementation of civil
engineering projects can not only avoid damaging important habitats and harming protected species, but can
also lead to the creation of new habitats or the construction of facilities to encourage certain species of animal.
Such development can thereby assist the sponsors of Local Biodiversity Action Plans (LBAPs) in achieving their
targets. Maintaining biodiversity and, where appropriate, enhancing it, are key aspects of sustainable
development, and are important parts of the UK and devolved governments policies. Marine development may
provide more-limited opportunities for enhancement but offshore structures can lead to benign increases in
plant and fish populations on and around such structures.
In order to support the conservation of biodiversity at all scales, 20 years ago in 1992, the UK Government
signed up to the Convention on Biodiversity at the United Nations Conference on Environment and
Development in Rio de Janeiro. This commitment has been translated into action through the publication of
Biodiversity the UK Action Plan 1994 and, more recently, national Biodiversity Action Plans (BAPS) such as
Biodiversity 2020: a strategy for Englands wildlife and ecosystem services (Defra, 2011) and BAPs at the local
or even company level. Further information can be found on the UK Biodiversity Action Plan website
(www.ukbap.org), which supports the implementation of the UK BAP on behalf of the UK Biodiversity
Partnership.
Ecological assessment1 of a development project at the design stage can help to identify potential adverse
impacts and can identify ways in which these can be mitigated or compensated for, or, where existing interest
can be enhanced, new habitats created or species encouraged. Land that is of high or moderate value for
wildlife is normally recognised in some way, usually by a designation such as Site of Special Scientific Interest
(SSSI), which is a statutory designation, or Site of Importance for Nature Conservation (SINC) or similar,
usually placed on site by the local planning authority. In the marine environment, the terms Marine Protection
Areas in Scotland, and Marine Conservation Zones in England and Wales are used for sites designated for a
variety of reasons including biodiversity value. Wherever possible, the development of such sites should be
avoided, as the opportunities to mitigate for damage to or loss of habitats or species may be strictly limited.
Where significant impacts are predicted, it may be appropriate to consider whether proposals should proceed.
A major guidance document is CIRIAs Working with wildlife: guidance for the construction industry (C691,
2011) was published in order to assist all involved in civil engineering or public realm projects to better address
and manage the wildlife issues on development sites. Further CIRIA guidance Delivering biodiversity benefit
through green infrastructure (C711, 2011) provides clear messages of what the goals and objectives of green
infrastructure for the construction industry.
Biodiversity guidance can also be found on the UK Green Building Council online portal www.ukgbc.org and on
the Institute for Ecology and Environmental Management web site (www.ieem.net/).
$ If there has been a significant delay between initial surveys having been undertaken and works
proceeding, then an updating of the initial surveys may be necessary. This is especially true if any
protected species such as bats have the potential to be present or if invasive plants such as Japanese
Knotweed are likely to occur.
Active management of civil engineering and public realm sites is needed throughout the project. Protected
species not originally on the site may find conditions during the construction stage advantageous to colonise,
resulting in delays. For example, waterfowl nesting on a temporary cofferdam would delay its removal, and
sand martins nesting in a stockpile of sand may delay Contractors ability to access the sand when they wish.
An Ecological Assessment should, at a minimum, be a Phase 1 type of assessment, as defined in the

Handbook for Phase 1 Habitat Survey (Joint Nature Conservation Committee, 2010), and carried out prior to
any construction activity taking place on site.
CEEQUAL Ltd
77
6.1.1
LAND OF HIGH ECOLOGICAL VALUE
28 pts
Is the project, including land used for temporary works, being

placed on or using land or seabed that has been identified as of
high ecological value or as having species of high value*?
Client
Design
Construct
28

This question must not be scoped out except for projects that involve structures that are
necessary for health & safety (for example, navigation equipment along coastlines), to
enable access to a site for public education or enjoyment, or for refurbishment projects
Scope-out
that happen to be in areas of high ecological value. For a Design Award or for town/city
Guidance
centre public realm schemes, this question can be scoped out in situations where the
Designer had no influence over the choice of location. Evidence for this would be in the
brief.
* Land or marine area that is of high ecological value is:
that which is designated for its nature conservation value for example, as a Site of
Special Scientific Interest (SSSI), a Marine Conservation Zone, a National Nature
Reserve (NNR), a statutory Local Nature Reserve (LNR) or land designated as a Site of
Importance for Nature Conservation (SINC) or equivalent by an official conservation
body such as Natural England, Countryside Council for Wales (CCW), Scottish Natural
Heritage (SNH), Northern Ireland Environment Agency (NIEA) or the Marine
Management Organisation (MMO), a Wildlife Trust or a local planning authority, or has
been designated as an important green corridor;
and/or
Question
Guidance
that which has been identified as being of ecological importance by an ecological

assessment of the site (a Phase 1 Habitat Survey following Joint Nature Conservation
Committee (JNCC) guidance, and subsequent more-detailed surveys where
necessary), carried out prior to any site clearance or other activity. The ecological
assessment should have been carried out by, or carefully supervised by, a suitably
qualified ecologist who is a member of the IEEM or is a Chartered Biologist.
A site may be considered to be of ecological importance if it comprises UK and/or Local

Biodiversity Action Plan habitats or hosts high value species. Species are deemed to be of high
value if they are:
protected by law;
a UK and/or Local Biodiversity Action Plan priority species;
a Species or Habitat of Principal Importance for Biodiversity as listed in the Natural
Environment and Rural Communities Act 2006;
Birds of Conservation Concern; or
IUCN Red List species.
Note that this guidance refers to any part of a site that may be of high ecological value. It may be
that there are parts of a site that are of low ecological value that can be developed without any
significant impact on biodiversity, even though the site itself includes land of high ecological value.
As long as damage to the areas of high ecological value is avoided, the points can be awarded.
Note that for land-based projects, designation of land as of high landscape value and high
ecological value are not necessarily coincident land can be one but not necessarily the other.
Hence this question appears here as well as a near-equivalent questions in Section 4, Question
4.4.2 and 4.5.1.
Note also that points cannot be scored here unless surveys or desk studies are carried out to
identify the ecological value of the site.
Evidence
Guidance
78
Evidence would be in the EIA, ecological assessment or some other environmental

assessment as defined in the footnote on the previous page.
CEEQUAL Ltd
6.1.2
12 pts
CONSULTATION WITH NATURE CONSERVATION

ORGANISATIONS
Has consultation with a relevant nature conservation organisation*
on the ecological impact of the proposals been undertaken and
communicated to project team members at each stage of the
project?
Client
Design
Construct

This question should not be scoped out for the Client role as, even for a remote location
with no apparent nature conservation interests; there may be organisations and groups
Scope-out
that ought to be consulted. If the initial consultation has established that there are no
Guidance
nature conservation matters to consider, the question may be scoped out for design and
construction.
Question
Guidance
* For example, Natural England, Countryside Council for Wales, Scottish Natural Heritage,
Northern Ireland Environment Agency, the Environment Agency, SEPA, the Marine Management
Organisation (MMO), the local authority ecologist, local biodiversity records centre or the local
Wildlife Trust or equivalent.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence would be demonstration of the consultation in the form of a report, minutes or

correspondence. Evidence of communication would be through team meeting minutes or
other briefing note.
6.1.3 (M) ECOLOGICAL WORKS PLAN
21 pts
Has an ecological works plan or an ecological section in the

integrated project management plan or site environmental
management plan been drawn up, and then implemented during
construction?
Client
Design
Construct

Scope-out
Guidance

Such a plan should be of appropriate quality and should include issues such as appropriate
seasons for carrying out works in order to minimise adverse impacts on wildlife, the methods to be
used if this proves impossible, responding to unexpectedly finding wildlife on site, control of
noxious plants, methods to prevent colonisation of the site during the project (if inappropriate),
communication about these issues with project staff, and procedures for regular monitoring and
reviewing.
If a plan has not been prepared by the Client and/or Designer and thus 0 points have been scored
in the Client or Design columns, the Contractor can still score 7 points if they prepare and
implement their own plan at the construction stage.
Question
Guidance
An Ecological Works Plan or an ecological section in the Site Environmental or Integrated Project
Management Plan is designed to be implemented at the construction stage of the project. Hence,
more points are given for this stage. A site ecologist may need to be appointed to assist with
implementation. Depending on the size of the project and the ecological issues involved, this can
be full-time, part-time or on a Watching Brief basis as appropriate for the scale, nature and
location of the project.
Some form of plan or statement for considering ecological aspects of the project should be drawn
up by the Client, and a preliminary version of the plan should be drawn up at the design stage.
The points for these roles are scored for drawing up the preliminary plans at the relevant stage in
the project. The full score for Construction can be awarded only if there is evidence for correct
implementation of the plan.
CEEQUAL Ltd
79
Evidence
Guidance
6.2
Evidence needs to identify that ecological considerations (such as nesting seasons,

spawning grounds, and/or protected areas of the site) have been built into the project
planning. At the Client & Design stage, this may be incorporation of requirements into
project briefs, and/or tender documents and specifications. At Construction stage, it may
be a stand-alone plan or part of other, more-generic, project planning documentation.
Evidence of implementation should be shown through routine project progress monitoring
and reporting.
Legal requirements
Certain species of plants and animals and/or their nesting, roosting or resting habitats are protected by
legislation, such as the Wildlife and Countryside Act 1981 (WCA, 1981) (as amended), Nature Conservation
(Scotland) Act 2004, Wildlife and Natural Environment (Scotland) Act 2011, the Protection of Badgers Act 1992
and The Conservation of Habitats and Species Regulations 2010. Failure to take adequate steps to protect
such features could lead to adverse impacts and, possibly, to prosecution. Certain offences may be committed
through reckless actions placing an onus on the developer of land to demonstrate that they took all reasonable
steps to identify if any protected species were present on their site and that, if they were, they were adequately
protected throughout the development process.
Section 14 (2) of the WCA 1981 makes it an offence for certain species of plant (as listed in Schedule 9 of the
Act) to be planted in the wild or otherwise caused to grow in the wild. There are a number of plants included in
Schedule 9 that present problems to civil engineering projects, including Japanese Knotweed (Fallopia
japonica) giant hogweed (Heracleum mantegazzianum), and Himalayan Balsam (Impatiens glandulifera), the
eradication and disposal of which may require special procedures. Other weeds may cause particular problems
in wetlands.
Injurious weeds, as defined by the Weeds Act 1959, such as common ragwort (Senecio jacobaea), may also be
a problem, particularly if there are livestock within the area. If any species is causing a problem, they may
require on-site control.
For marine environments, of particular relevance are the Marine and Coastal Access Act 2009 and the Marine
(Scotland) Act 2010. There is also a UK Marine Policy Statement which applies to all UK waters. It is the
framework for preparing Marine Plans, ensuring consistency across the UK, and provides direction for new
marine licensing and other authorisation systems in each UK Administration. Marine Protected Areas (MPAs)
and Marine Conservation Zones (MCZs) describe a wide range of marine areas that have some level of
restriction to protect living, non-living, cultural, and/or historic resources. In the UK, MPAs and MCZs have
primarily been set up to help conserve marine biodiversity, in particular species and habitats of European and
national importance. In addition, there is a European Marine Strategy Framework Directive with the aim of
achieving Good Environmental Status in Europes seas by 2020.
The advice and views of a suitably qualified ecologist who is a member of the IEEM or a Chartered Biologist
may be needed to judge whether the following actions have been achieved.
6.2.1
SURVEYS FOR PROTECTED SPECIES
6.2.1 a)
7 pts
Have appropriate surveys for protected plant and animal species

been specified by the Client and the resources provided to
undertake them effectively?
Client
Design
Construct

6.2.1 b)
12 pts
Have appropriate surveys for protected plant and animal species

been undertaken at each stage of the project?

If protected plant and animal species were found on the project site
11
and/or temporary working areas, have plans for protecting these
been:
6.2.1 c)
29 pts
80
18
Drawn up and approved? If Yes, score 11.

Monitored? If Yes, score a further 9.
Achieved? If Yes, score a further 9.
If None of these actions, score 0.
CEEQUAL Ltd
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Plans are likely to include guidance on appropriate times for carrying out work for example,
clearing vegetation outside the nesting season or avoiding works during spawning together with
method statements and instructions for relocation of species. Plans should be approved by all
relevant parties such as the Client, Contractor and Ecologist. Under certain circumstances,
especially when dealing with protected species, licences may have to be acquired and associated
plans and method statements may need approval by a statutory agency such as Natural England,
CCW, SNH, NIEA, MMO or their equivalent.
Note that achievement must be assessed appropriately up to the point of assessment, not
against a prediction of what is anticipated to be achieved in the long term.
Evidence
Guidance
Some evidence of steps taken to safeguard protected species may be gained from
documentation such as a Site Environmental Management Plan, but a site visit or detailed
records including photographs may be required to see or demonstrate examples of
practical measures that have been implemented. It may also be necessary to talk to
relevant staff.
Note that failure to score against this question and Question 6.2.1 may affect the final
Award grade if there has been a legal non-compliance.
6.2.2
INJURIOUS OR INVASIVE SPECIES

If there were invasive animal or plants species or injurious weeds
present on site, has:
Design
14
Construct
14
A method statement (or equivalent) been drawn up and

approved for their control and management? If Yes, score 14.
Has it been monitored? If Yes, score a further 7.
And achieved? If Yes, score a further 7.
If None of these actions, score 0.
28 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Client
In a UK context, invasive animal or plants species or injurious weeds are defined in legislation
(such as Schedule 9 of the WCA 1981 or in the Wildlife (Northern Ireland) Order 1985), In respect
of Schedule 9 plants, it may not be possible to be sure that any measures to eradicate the plants
have been wholly successful, at least not for some time after the project is completed. Therefore
the evidence to look for is whether or not all the actions that were set out in the method statement
have been carried out. If they have, the control of the plants should also have been achieved. So
achievement must be assessed appropriately up to the point of assessment, not against a
prediction of what is anticipated to be achieved in the long-term. Constraints maps as a record of
areas treated can also be a useful tool to judge whether the objectives of invasive species control
has been or is being achieved.
Question
Guidance
Some other species of plants including those covered by the Weeds Act may be considered
invasive and/or injurious if they cause problems to third parties. For example, common ragwort
Senecio jacobaea is a native plant that is poisonous to grazing animals, but which is of value in
terms of biodiversity, not least because it is a host plant for the larvae of a UK BAP species the
cinnabar moth. Such species should only be considered under this section if identified as a
specific problem in regard to the site in question and its neighbours.
Some introduced animal species are invasive because of reproductive or competitive advantage,
such as signal crayfish or mitten crabs. Method statements are required to prevent the spread of
these species to areas where they are not already present. Note also that some species of animal
are also called pest species, for example brown rat and feral pigeon. However, the occurrence of
these species is not usually increased by civil engineering projects, and they are more a health &
safety hazard for the workers than of strictly environmental concern. Their control is more closely
related to good housekeeping and hence they are not dealt with here.
Guidance on the management of invasive species is available in CIRIA Invasive species
management for infrastructure managers and the construction industry (C679, 2008).
CEEQUAL Ltd
81
Note that achievement must be assessed appropriately up to the point of assessment, not
against a prediction of what is anticipated to be achieved in the long term.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should be in the form of method statements or other appropriate management

control. Monitoring and achievement should be evidenced by documentation that
demonstrates that the method statements have been adhered to.
Note that failure to score against this question and Question 6.2.1 may affect the final
Award grade if there has been a legal non-compliance.
6.3
Conservation and enhancement of biodiversity
Biodiversity represents the richness and variety of plants, birds, animals, insects and soils that exist throughout
the world. The UK has lost over 100 species in the last century or so, and many more have declined in number,
range or both (Making Biodiversity Happen, DETR, 1998). As a response to this issue, and in accord with its
obligations under the Convention on Biological Diversity, a UK BAP was first published in 1994 and is now
being implemented and developed by a partnership of the UK Biodiversity Partnership and the UK Government
see http://www.ukbap.org.uk/. BAPs have been or are being produced at local level in response.
The construction industry generally, and especially civil engineering, has a major influence on the landscape
and is bound to affect biodiversity. The industry should be seen as a contributor to achieving the targets set out
in local BAPs rather than simply as always harming biodiversity. Steps that the industry should take include:
avoiding impacts on important habitats and species, and reducing habitat fragmentation;
mitigating or if this is not possible compensating for any impacts; and
always endeavouring to enhance biodiversity wherever possible.
Where potential damage to existing wildlife or wildlife habitat identified in any ecological assessment of the
site is avoidable, then measures should be put in place at the construction stage to protect such features
see CIRIAs publication Working with wildlife: guidance for the construction industry (C691, 2011). Where the
project being assessed will lead to the permanent loss of such wildlife features, there should be evidence that
this loss will be compensated for or mitigated, preferably on the project site or as near as possible to it.
6.3.1
EXISTING ECOLOGICAL FEATURES - RECOMMENDATIONS

Have recommendations been included in the design for conserving
existing ecological features, such as species and habitats or green
infrastructure, identified in an ecological assessment as being of
value*?
6.3.1 a)
24 pts
Client
Design
Construct
24
If less than 30% conserved, score 0.

More than 30% and up to 50%, score 4.
More than 90% and less than 100%, score 20.
If 100%, score 24.
Have recommendations been included in the design for mitigating
16
or compensating for any loss of such ecological features?
6.3.1 b)
10 pts
6.3.1 c)
7 pts
82
If up to 10% mitigated or compensated, score 0.

If 100%, score 16.
Have recommendations been included in the design for enhancing
7
the existing ecological features of the site?
If enhancement in addition to conservation, mitigation or
compensation, score an additional 7.
CEEQUAL Ltd
Scope-out
Guidance
Parts a), b) and c) can only be scoped out if there are no existing ecological features on
site. It is only possible to scope out the whole question, not just sub-parts. Note that the
maximum score attainable for parts a)+b) combined is 24. See the table below to assist in
calculating the score.
* For example, ecological features identified in an ecological assessment as being of value could
include designated land, protected species, local, regional or national BAP habitats or species
see definitions under Question 6.1.1. To calculate the percentages for the purpose of scoring,
identify the existing ecological features on the project, decide for each what the appropriate
measure is (number or area), calculate the percentage conserved, mitigated or compensated for
of each feature at the end of the design, and then average them arithmetically to arrive at the
percentage to be used for scoring.
Question 6.3.1 b) can be completely ignored if the score in Question 6.3.1 a) is for 100%
conservation. If there is less than 100% conservation then Question 6.3.1 b) should be considered
for the habitat not conserved. The maximum scores available for a) and b) combined are therefore
as shown below.
Question 6.3.1 c) can be scored only if the score in a) or b) is greater than 0, and the
enhancement has to be proportionate to the nature, scale, context and location of the site see
guidance below.
Question
Guidance
Conservation
Mitigation or
Compensation
4.3.1 a)
score
4.3.1 b)
score
Combined score
4.3.1 a)+b)
0%
100%
16
16
0% - less than 30%
70% to less than 100%
12
12
30% - less than 50%
10
14
50% - less than 70%
16
70% - less than 90%
14
20
90% - less than 100%
0% to less than 10%
20
20
100%
0%
24
24
Conservation or protection includes protection of existing habitats and other measures to

ensure that existing species on or near the site are not harmed (such as protection of badger
setts, bat roosts, ponds, fencing off with clear signs, staff briefings, and reptile or amphibian
fences put up to ensure that species will not migrate into the construction area). This is greatly
preferred to relocation.
Mitigation or compensation (which might include relocation or re-instatement of existing
habitats) is the minimum requirement, if leaving the area untouched is not possible. This has to be
carried out by, or in liaison with, a qualified ecologist. Relocation sites have to be very carefully
selected and re-instatement of habitats requires careful planning and skilful implementation. Longterm aftercare and monitoring is essential to ensure that these measures have been successful
see Section 6.5.
Enhancement means added-value measures that go beyond, but include, conservation and
protection measures. Examples of these measures include re-instatement of appropriate
vegetation, such as reeds along banks of lakes or ponds, strengthening of hedgerows to improve
or increase wildlife corridors, clearing intrusive vegetation (such as rhododendron or sycamore)
from existing woodland, linking existing habitats (for instance via lines of trees, hedgerows or
ditches). Note, for example, that one square metre of new reeds added to a 20-hectare site is
nowhere near sufficient to score the points. The acceptable threshold for an enhancement to
score should, for example, be at least sufficient to provide a new viable habitat in proportion to the
overall scale of development, say at least 1% of the site area.
Note that creation of new features is covered in Section 6.4.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence would be in the form of drawings and specifications showing that the
recommendations were incorporated into the design and, for a Whole Team or Design &
Construction Award, actually delivered. Seek guidance from a qualified and experienced
ecologist where necessary.
CEEQUAL Ltd
83
6.3.2
EXISTING ECOLOGICAL FEATURES - MONITORING
14 pts
Is there evidence that the implementation of these

recommendations has been monitored throughout the course of the
contract?
Client
Design
Construct
14

Scope-out
Guidance
If the ecological assessment identified features of value, but no measures to protect,

conserve or enhance these have been recommended, Questions 6.3.1 and 6.3.2 should
both score 0. They should be scoped out only if no features of ecological value were
identified on the site.
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
Data that shows that monitoring has taken place or is taking place.
6.3.3
EXISTING ECOLOGICAL FEATURES IMPLEMENTATION

SUCCESS
Does monitoring data show that implementation of these measures
has been successful?
18 pts
Client
Design
Construct
18

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out if timescale of the assessment does not allow for gathering of conclusive
monitoring data.
Question
Guidance
The Assessor should judge these factors against recommendations and observations contained in
any ecological assessment of the site. Note that success must be assessed appropriately up to
the point of assessment, not against a prediction of what is anticipated to be achieved in the long
term.
Evidence
Guidance
Monitoring data that shows measures have been successful.
6.4
Habitat creation measures
Civil engineering projects often present opportunities for or new habitats to be created. Land of previously low
wildlife interest can be adapted to provide wildlife habitat, thus enhancing biodiversity and the overall ecological
interest of the area. Some projects, particularly linear ones such as roads and railways, hinder the movement of
animals and create an added threat to their existence. The deliberate incorporation of features for animals can
both reduce this threat and positively encourage them to get to the new habitats the project has created.
Note: To be awarded points under this sub-section the measures for which a score is awarded for this question
need to be:
84
in addition to any measures that were included either to compensate or mitigate for the loss of a
structure or facility previously on site, or
to be for protecting existing species from harm (such as road tunnels where a new road crosses
existing territories of animal species).
CEEQUAL Ltd
6.4.1
NEW WILDLIFE HABITATS
Client
Have recommendations or opportunities for creating new wildlife

habitats been identified by a specialist ecologist and incorporated
in the project?
Construct
14
If No, score 0.
If plans drawn up, score 4.
If plans include highly significant habitats or species, score an
additional 4.
If incorporated in the project, score 7.
If highly significant habitats or species are incorporated in the
project, score an additional 7.
22 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Design
In the UK and Ireland, highly significant habitats or species are normally classified as Biodiversity
Action Plans (BAP) habitats or species because the process of creating BAPs includes a
significance judgement.
Question
Guidance
Habitat in this context refers to an area of unified vegetation or ecosystem, such as ponds, reed
beds or other wetland features, species-rich hedgerow, broadleaved woodland, and/or grassland.
It does not include artificial features such as bird boxes, bat boxes, badger setts, or otter holts,
which are covered in Question 6.4.2. New habitats are those that currently do not exist on the site,
but may otherwise be appropriate. Habitat creation proposals may be on-site or off-site. Examples
of the latter would include landscape scale conservation and green infrastructure where benefits
can be significant if strategically planned and implemented. A specialist in habitat creation or in a
particular group of animals may have to be consulted in drawing up these proposals.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be drawings and photographs of what has been included. To score for
BAP habitats, it would be necessary to refer back to relevant authority plans or an
ecological assessment of the project.
6.4.2
SPECIAL STRUCTURES OR FACILITIES FOR WILDLIFE
21 pts
Have recommendations or opportunities for installing special

structures or facilities for encouraging or accommodating
appropriate wildlife (especially BAP species) been identified and
incorporated in the project?
Client
Design
Construct
14
If No, score 0.
If plans drawn up, score 7.
If incorporated in the project, score 14.
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Scope out only if there are genuinely no opportunities for installing such structures or if
doing so is regarded as actively unhelpful, for example in reducing amenity use of the
project.
Such structures may include artificial bat roosting facilities, bird nesting facilities, artificial badger
setts or otter holts, green bridges, green roofs and walls or tunnels under roads or railways.
Measures should be appropriate to the scale and nature of the project, for example, one bat box
on a large project would be insufficient. The advice of an ecologist should be sought as to what
would be considered appropriate.
As with newly created habitats, these should have been recommended, designed and sited by, or
in consultation with, a suitably qualified ecologist.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of photographs or drawings that show incorporation of

special facilities. Reference also needs to be made to the ecological assessment to ensure
that these facilities are not being provided merely as mitigation.
CEEQUAL Ltd
85
6.4.3
NET INCREASE IN AREA/FEATURES OF HIGH VALUE

On completion of the project, is there any evidence of a net
increase in area or features of high ecological value compared to
site baseline data?
Client
Design
Construct
21
If <5%, score 0.
If 5% to <25% increase, score 5.
If over 75% increase, score 21.
21 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Scope out only if there was genuinely no opportunity for increasing such habitat or if
doing so was regarded as actively unhelpful.
The assessment work that needs to be undertaken to gain these points should compare the area
or features of high ecological value that has been created with that which was on the site before
the civil engineering or public realm works commenced. There is an assumption that, in time, the
quality of the habitat will be similar to that which has been affected by the works. If this is not likely
to be the case, a simple comparison in area terms may not be justified. In addition, it must be
recognised that the assessment is being done at the end of construction, and needs to assess
against what could reasonably be expected by that stage.
In respect of urban sites, this can be accomplished by creating landscaping that incorporates
ecological principles in its design and implementation. It can also be achieved by creating green
or brown roofs or by providing nest boxes and other structures that help to accommodate wildlife.
Note: The Assessor or the Verifier may wish to seek the advice of a suitably qualified ecologist to
assess whether the issues covered in this section have been adequately addressed. This person
may need to be a specialist in a particular group of plants or animals, and they should be a
member of the IEEM or a Chartered Biologist.
Evidence
Guidance
6.5
Evidence could be a written report by an ecologist or equivalent. The evidence for the
question needs to show the aim of the project team on this issue, and demonstrate that
they are on track for achieving the aimed for final condition.
Monitoring and maintenance
Monitoring and maintaining any habitat creation or species conservation measures is crucial not only to the
success of those measures, but also in helping to develop a body of knowledge about what works and what
does not. The monitoring programmes will focus on the main species of interest, whether plant or animal, taking
into account any seasonal restriction or habits of the species in question. Monitoring programmes, such as for
badgers, bats or birds can easily be established, as can checks for amphibians and reptiles. However, moredetailed investigations may be necessary for invertebrates, notably where plant habitats have been created or
managed to enhance their invertebrate potential.
All too often maintenance of habitats and species are neglected after completion of a project. This can result in
efforts to maintain or enhance nature conservation interest being wasted, because planting and other features
fail. Maintenance programmes need to be coordinated with any landscape management proposals, so that
vegetation management takes place at the appropriate time of year that will be beneficial for nature
conservation. Five years of management and maintenance should be considered as a minimum period,
although seven to ten years would be preferable.
86
CEEQUAL Ltd
6.5.1
21 pts
ONGOING ECOLOGICAL MANAGEMENT

Has a programme been drawn up for the ongoing ecological
management of habitats and species conservation measures,
including instructions for emergencies or abnormal events, to be
handed over to the owner or managing agent of the completed
project?
Client
Design
Construct
21

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out if the nature and scope of the project mean that there is no need for ongoing
ecological management of habitats and species conservation measures.
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a Landscape Management Plan with specific reference to requirements

of ecological habitat management or species conservation measures.
6.5.2
PROGRAMME FOR MONITORING
14 pts
Is there a programme in place (for the years after project

completion) for monitoring the success or otherwise of any
management, habitat creation or translocation and species
conservation measures undertaken on site?
Client
Design
Construct
14

Scope-out
Guidance
this question will depend on the nature, scale, location, duration and context of the project.
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a specific monitoring plan or part of a more-generic maintenance plan

that demonstrates that monitoring is in place.
CEEQUAL Ltd
87
Section 7: The Water Environment (Fresh & Marine)
7. THE WATER ENVIRONMENT

7.1
Basic principles
Protection of the water environment fresh and marine has risen up the public agenda during the last decade
and legislation has been introduced in order to minimise future impacts on this valuable resource. The UK
governments policies on Sustainable Development (1999, 2005) and Sustainable Construction (2000 and
2008) identify water use during construction and in completed works (covered in Section 8) and prevention of
pollution of the water environment as key issues for the construction industry in particular. Defras Making
Space for Water, PPS25 Development and Flood Risk (even though no longer official policy) and the NPPF
highlight the need to protect the water environment as well as consider flood risk from project concept stage
(flood risk is covered in the CEEQUAL Assessment in Section 4).
Legislation is in force to protect the fresh and marine water environments in and around the UK and this has
been strengthened by the implementation of the Water Framework Directive (WFD), which is the most
substantial piece of European Commission water legislation to date (see Section 7.2).
When looking at the impacts of civil engineering projects on water, the main aspects need to be considered are:
impacts on water resources;

impacts on and of flood risk; (SuDS is assessed in this section but flood risk overall is assessed in
Section 4.3);
protection and enhancement of the fresh and marine water environments (the feasibility, design and
construction stages lead to opportunities as well as threats to the water environment);
impacts and opportunities associated with water consumption (assessed in Section 8.6).
This section focuses on impacts on water resources and on protection and enhancement of the water
environment, whether fresh or marine. However, it is acknowledged by CEEQUAL, and needs to be
acknowledged by Assessors and Verifiers, that elements of all these connections between water and civil
engineering projects overlap.
7.1.1 (M) IMPACTS ON THE WATER ENVIRONMENT

7.1.1 a)
(M)
28 pts
Has a plan to control the impacts of the completed project on the

water environment (fresh and/or marine as appropriate) been
produced and necessary elements of the plan been incorporated in
the design?
Client
Design
Construct
28

7.1.1 b)
(M)
14 pts
7.1.1 c)
(M)
28 pts
Has this plan been implemented as far as practicable up to the end

of the assessment*?
14

Has a plan to control the impacts of the project on the water
environment (fresh and/or marine as appropriate) during
construction been produced and has this plan been implemented?
28

Scope-out
Guidance

* Note that, bearing in mind that a CEEQUAL Whole Team Assessment is completed at or
towards the end of construction, implementation in Question 7.1.1 a) can only be
assessed at the completion of the assessment and the extent of implementation of the plan
that could have been expected by that time.
Question
Guidance
The plan can be part of a Project Environmental Management Plan, SEMP or equivalent, or can
be a separate document. It should assess questions such as:
88
Is the project likely to affect adversely the local surface water and groundwater including
groundwater flows?
Is the project likely to affect the fresh or marine environment including from run-off or
discharges from the completed works and during construction?
Do the above include consideration of the potential effects of climate change and the
CEEQUAL Ltd
potential for more-intense rainfall events to wash pollutants into the water environment?
Could measures be implemented to reduce the projects impact on and water quality and
could these protect or enhance the water environment?
Note that this question is marked as (M), as it is very important that all project teams should
consider the potential impacts of their project on the freshwater environment and, where
appropriate, the marine environment in order to minimise potential impacts at the operational
stage (i.e. through design) and at the construction stage.
The need for abstraction, land drainage or discharge consents and/or land drainage appraisals
has to be considered as part of such a plan, as well as possible designs for drainage systems. As
with all plans of this type, it needs to include procedures for regular monitoring and reviewing. For
further guidance regarding construction impacts see Environmental good practice on site (Third
edition), CIRIA Publication (C692) and Control of water pollution from construction sites
guidance for consultants and contractors, (C532, 2001).
Evidence
Guidance
7.2
Evidence could include assessment of run-off, hydrological impacts, surface and

groundwater quality impacts, and/or risk assessments, and subsequent incorporation into
the design or construction plans.
Legal requirements
Numerous acts and regulations deal with the protection of water resources and the prevention of their pollution.
For freshwater environments, of particular relevance to the construction industry in the UK are the Water
Resources Act and Water Industry Act 1991, and the Environment Act 1995, which established the
Environment Agency and SEPA. European legislation is also now higher on the agenda including the Water
Framework Directive and Floods Directive (2007/60/EC).
The UKs Water Resources Act 1991 made provision for the need to apply for consent to abstract or discharge
water from or into controlled waters. Since their establishment through the Environment Act 1995, the
Environment Agency and SEPA are the bodies responsible for granting these consents, with the NIEA
undertaking similar duties in Northern Ireland. The Environment Act 1995 also added new sections to the Water
Resources Act (Section 161, A-D), which provide for the issue of anti-pollution works notices. They empower
the Environment Agency to serve notices on those responsible for actual or threatened pollution, requiring them
to carry out clean-up and remedial action as necessary. Failure to comply with such a notice is a criminal
offence.
For marine environments, of particular relevance are the Marine and Coastal Access Act of 2009, the Marine
(Scotland) Act 2010 and the Marine Works (Environmental Impact Assessment) Regulations 2007. There is
also a UK Marine Policy Statement, which applies to all UK waters. It is the framework for preparing Marine
Plans, ensuring consistency across the UK, and provides direction for new marine licensing and other
authorisation systems in each UK Administration. Marine Protected Areas (MPAs) describe a wide range of
marine areas that have some level of restriction to protect living, non-living, cultural, and/or historic resources.
In the UK, MPAs have primarily been set up to help conserve marine biodiversity, in particular species and
habitats of European and national importance. In addition, there is a European Marine Strategy Framework
Directive with the aim of achieving Good Environmental Status in Europes seas by 2020.
Also relevant to civil engineering and public realm projects in the UK are the Control of Pollution (Oil Storage)
Regulations 2001, which set minimum standards for works carried out and precautions to be taken to prevent
pollution of controlled waters from oil storage facilities of 200 litres or more, and equivalent provisions in
Scotland such as the Controlled Activities Regulations and the Oil Storage Regulations.
The European Water Framework Directive (WFD) is designed to improve and integrate the way ground and
surface waters are managed throughout Europe. This was transposed into UK law in 2003. Member States
must aim to reach good chemical and good ecological status in inland and coastal waters by 2015. The WFD is
designed to enhance the status and prevent further deterioration of aquatic ecosystems and associated
wetlands, to promote the sustainable use of water, to reduce pollution and to ensure progressive reduction of
groundwater pollution. It requires hydromorphological elements to be considered (i.e. both hydrology and
geomorphology).
This is not an exhaustive list of UK legislation relating to water and civil engineering projects. Details of relevant
legislation should form part of an EMS or equivalent.
CEEQUAL Ltd
89
7.2.1 (M) CONSULTATION WITH REGULATORY AUTHORITIES

Has consultation been undertaken with regulatory authorities about
water issues related to the project, including the need for any
consents, and has the outcome been communicated to project
team members at each stage of the project?
18 pts
Client
Design
Construct

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
It is advisable to consult the relevant regulatory authorities on any potential impacts a civil
engineering project may have on the freshwater and marine environments. Consultation will
promote discussion on how the projects environmental performance could be improved and
whether discharge or other consents are required. This includes projects where effects on water
are not immediately obvious as, for example, hydro-geological issues, which are not instantly
visible, may apply to the site.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of meeting notes or letters regarding obtaining consents or
licences. At construction stage, it could be actual applications and granting of licences.
Evidence also needs to be shown for appropriate communication of the outcomes of the
consultations or applications. These could be circulation of design notes, team briefings
or incorporation of licence and/or consent conditions into method statements.
7.2.2 (M) REGULATORY ACTIONS
Client
Have there been negative regulatory actions on water-related

issues (such as prosecution for pollution of a water body) during
construction?
6 pts
Design
Construct

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
It is acknowledged that whether or not there have been negative regulatory actions these may be
due to varying inspection levels, site size variations and possible geographical variations in
application of the regulations in regions. However, in principle, the number of regulatory actions
on a site is considered a valid way of assessing breaches of regulations. For example, such
actions or proceedings could be against the Contractor by the relevant authority for breach of
environmental legislation or the issue of a Works Notice or equivalent. The relevant regulatory
authority could be the Environment Agency, SEPA, NIEA, the MMO, and/or a Local Authority.
Evidence
Guidance
A signed statement from the Project Director will be acceptable evidence for this (as it is
impossible to obtain evidence of non-existence of any negative regulatory action). Note
that failure to score against this question may affect the final Award grade if there has
7.3
Protection of the freshwater and marine environments
When evaluating the potential impact of a civil engineering or public realm project on the freshwater
environment, the potential impact on both groundwater and surface water must be considered. Potential
impacts from the marine environment may be very similar on coastal projects, but different in character for
offshore projects such as wind farms, oil and gas production facilities or pipeline and cable installations.
For land-based projects, the geological history and hydro-geological details of the area will be important at
design stage, as these will determine the groundwater movement in the area. This will help to decide the best
design and construction method to protect the environment, including the hydro-geological regime. The design
should aim to control run-off paths and drainage, and the quality and turbidity of the run-off is of great concern.
At construction stage, prevention of pollution of bodies of fresh water and the sea is of extreme importance.
There are a variety of potential sources of site-derived contamination, including:
90
operational leaks and spillage from tanks, pipes and vehicles;

CEEQUAL Ltd
accidents or spillage during storage and transport of raw materials, manufactured products and waste
materials;
storage of waste on or adjacent to the site;
leaks from drains from process areas;
movement of contaminated groundwater onto the site from areas that are contaminated;
demolition of works that have contained contaminating materials;
silt washed from the site.
Contamination of the freshwater or marine environments may also come from materials incorporated into the
works. The potential of materials and products to leach pollutants into the environment should be assessed
during design stage. Sound advice on these issues is available from the following CIRIA publications:
(C649) Control of water pollution from linear construction projects. Site Guide (2006).
(C648) Control of water pollution from linear construction projects. Technical Guidance (2006).
(C692) Environmental good practice on site guide (third edition) (2010).
7.3.1
POLLUTION PREVENTION
7.3.1 a)
14 pts
Have specific measures been taken to prevent pollution of

groundwater, existing freshwater features or the sea (as
appropriate) during operation and maintenance?
Client
Design
Construct
14

7.3.1 b)
20 pts
Have specific measures been taken to prevent pollution of

groundwater, existing freshwater features or the sea (as
appropriate) during construction?
20

7.3.1 c)
9 pts
Have existing water features been protected from degradation or

physical damage by construction plant and processes?

Scope-out
Guidance
May be scoped out if no significant or sensitive ground and surface waters or features are
within or near the site and if the project has no connection to the sea.
At design stage, the actions called for by these questions would include the location of storage for
fuels, chemicals or other potentially-polluting substances away from sensitive areas, restriction on
the use of chemical weedkillers near a watercourse or the sea, separating foul and surface water,
and inclusion of interceptors and drainage channels.
Question
Guidance
At construction stage the actions called for by these questions could include measures to prevent
leakage of pollutants into a watercourse or the sea, such as bunding, appropriate storage, spill
kits, and/or emergency response plans. Other issues must also be considered, such as run-off
containing high volumes of silt and poor site management. Procedures for managing these risks
must also be implemented. In relation to water features, a distinction must be made between
pollution-related issues and physical damage to the water feature. Examples include protection of
banks of ponds, lakes, streams, rivers, canals, the seashore or seabed against damage by
construction plant or processes.
Early consideration should be given to construction risks at the design stage to enable appropriate
systems of work or appropriate site layouts to be prepared, as well as to ensure that risks
identified during an earlier environmental assessment are incorporated into the construction plan.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence can be drafts of operation and maintenance manuals, minutes of meetings and
other documentation. Evidence of positive measures should be documented at design
stage. Evidence during construction could be in the form of photographs and other
documentation or could be gained from a site visit. To score points during construction
stage, evidence must be robust to ensure that all risks to the freshwater and marine
environments have been considered and mitigated.
Note that company-wide key performance indicators are insufficient as evidence for this
question.
CEEQUAL Ltd
91
7.3.2
LONG-TERM MONITORING OF IMPACTS
18 pts
Have measures (or equipment) been incorporated in the project

that will allow long-term monitoring of the projects impact on the
freshwater and/or marine environments as appropriate?
Client
Design
Construct
18

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Examples include measuring run-off quantities, establishing adequacy of compensation water

from a dam project, monitoring hydrological impacts of projects that involve changes to existing
watercourses, groundwater quality monitoring, use of flow recorders or level monitors, and
monitoring discharges to the sea from coastal or offshore facilities.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence will vary greatly depending on the type of project being assessed.
Appropriateness of measures will have to be judged and agreed by the Assessor and
Verifier. However, the guidance above gives examples of the sorts of measures that could
be considered.
7.3.3
SUSTAINABLE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
7.3.3 a)
6 pts
7.3.3 b)
22 pts
Is there evidence that the use of Sustainable Drainage Systems*

(SuDS) has been considered for incorporation into the design?
Client
Design
Construct

Is there evidence that Sustainable Drainage Systems* (SuDS)
have been incorporated into the project where appropriate?
22
Question 7.3.3 a) Scope out only for marine and offshore projects, where here is clearly
no prospect of SuDS being applicable and on refurbishment projects where drainage is not
Scope-out part of the scope of works.
Guidance Question 7.3.3 b) Scope out only if points have been scored on Question 7.3.3 a) and
SuDS have been deemed inappropriate for the project (for example, on a river wall
strengthening project)
* For example, rainwater retention, balancing ponds, reedbed systems, and/or grass roofs.
For the policy context, see Flood and Water Management Act 2010 and the NPPF for England
and equivalents elsewhere. For guidance on SuDS refer to CIRIA Publications:
Question
Guidance
Sustainable urban drainage systems best practice manual (C523, 2001).

Design for exceedance in urban drainage (C635, 2006).
The SuDS Manual (C697, 2007).
Site handbook for the construction of SuDS (C698, 2007).
The Flood and Water Management Act 2010 promotes the use of SuDS and requires that
proposed drainage systems meet new national standards for sustainable drainage. The
incorporation of SuDS must be actively considered. If the project generates no additional run-off,
or (if consultation with the local authority) SuDS are found not to be beneficial or to be
inappropriate in a particular case, this should be a conscious and informed decision, and the next
question can be scoped out on that basis.
The score for Question 7.3.3 b) is shown across the Design and Construct columns. This not only
means that the Designer has to have made the decision to, and designed SuDS for incorporation
into the project but that, for the score to be gained in a Whole Team Award, the SuDS need to
have actually been constructed, not just designed.
Evidence
Guidance
92
Evidence should be provided to demonstrate that SuDS have been considered and
implemented where appropriate. This could be notes from a design meeting or part of the
Clients brief. Evidence may include drawings or specifications showing the incorporation
of SuDS.
CEEQUAL Ltd
7.3.4
MANAGING RUN-OFF AT SOURCE

What percentage of total surface water runoff* from the completed
project has been managed at source through infiltration?
Design
Construct
32
If up to 30%, score 8.
If above 90% of run-off managed at source, score 32.
32 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Client
Scope out only for marine and offshore projects or if infiltration has been deemed
inappropriate by the assessment carried in Question 7.3.3 (for example, due to poor
infiltration potential or ground contamination risks).
* Calculations to be based on the 1 in 30 annual probability event (the probability commonly used
to size below-ground drainage systems because it is what is required for Sewers for Adoption).
Question
Guidance
The use of SuDS can provide numerous benefits to flood risk, water quality and water resource
availability. Many SuDS will attenuate flow and provide water treatment through entrapment or
settlement and the use of these systems are addressed in Question 7.3.3. This question
specifically relates to managing surface water run-off through infiltration. Infiltration of surface
water run-off can provide betterment in terms of flood risk from the receiving watercourse and can
aid with aquifer recharge.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence would include calculations demonstrating management of surface water run-off

and plans illustrating the areas of the site that drain to infiltration systems.
7.3.5
WATER QUALITY DURING CONSTRUCTION

If the works could affect a body of ground or surface waters, has
the water quality of that water body been monitored before
construction and then regularly during construction in accordance
with the regime identified as appropriate in the risk assessment?
20 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Client
Design
Construct
20
If No, score 0.
If monitoring system established in accordance with the results of
the risk assessment, score 10.
If the monitoring shows adverse effect, but effective mitigation
measures can be demonstrated, score 13.
If the monitoring shows no adverse effect, score 20
May be scoped out for marine and offshore projects or if no significant or sensitive body of
ground or surface water is within or near the site.
Visual inspection of watercourses is considered to be standard industry practice on sites with
ground and surface waters or features on or near them, due to the ease with which silt, in
particular, can enter and be detected. This level of inspection is therefore not considered a
sufficient level of investigation to score on this question. Risk assessment of the water quality
impacts on the environment should be undertaken to establish appropriate level of on-site
monitoring and chemical analysis.
Question
Guidance
Monitoring may be carried out in liaison with the Environment Agency, SEPA or NIEA or their
equivalents elsewhere. However, it is considered good practice for Contractors to be proactive in
establishing a monitoring regime and it is in their own interest to do so.
In this section, emphasis is placed on monitoring, both short-term and long-term. Evaluation of the
long-term impact of materials may be difficult if materials have been used that have not had longterm research carried out on them. For example, these may have delayed pollution
characteristics, which would be costly and possibly difficult to rectify.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence can be in the form of monitoring data and other documentation showing the
methods of monitoring used.
CEEQUAL Ltd
93
7.4
Enhancement of the water environment
Opportunities should be taken to enhance the water environment whenever appropriate. Most of these will arise
at design stage, when modifications to the design can be carried out at little or no extra cost. At the construction
stage, opportunities can still occur once conditions on site are better known. However, this will require good cooperation between the project Client, Designer and Contractor.
During assessment, it is necessary to understand reasons why an evaluation of opportunities may not have led
to enhancement of the water environment, even though opportunities may have been identified. It is important
to take account of costs, appropriate use of project funding in the project programme and safety issues.
Positive impacts on the water environment may not be visible for a long time, possibly long after handing over
the project to the Client. This is why there are no questions on the long-term success of the measures.
7.4.1
IMPROVING THE WATER ENVIRONMENT
7.4.1 a)
8 pts
Have opportunities to improve the local water environment been

considered and identified, and, where appropriate, included in the
design?
Client
Design
Construct

7.4.1 b)
6 pts
Have the designed features been implemented?
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out only where there are no water bodies local to the project. Part b) can be scoped
out if the consideration at part a) concludes that no opportunities were appropriate.
Examples of opportunities to improve the local water environment (whether fresh or marine)
include cleaning up existing degraded or silted-up ponds or waterways, introducing aquatic plants
that help cleanse the water in existing surface waters, and the removal of invasive and damaging
aquatic plants and sources of water pollution.
Question
Guidance
Capturing water for beneficial use, including certain SuDS techniques, can provide new water
features or aquatic habitat to enhance biodiversity. Alternatively, captured water could offer other
benefits such as an alternate water resource or heat sink.
The WFD is striving to restore, improve and enhance the quality of European water resources, as
well as prevent further deterioration. Contribution to achieving WFD targets should be therefore
explored and incorporated were possible in new developments.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence needs to demonstrate that features (such as the examples above) have been
included in the works. This needs to demonstrate both design stage consideration (such
as through drawings or specifications) and construction stage implementation (such as
through photographs).
7.4.2
INCORPORATING EXISTING WATER FEATURES
20 pts
Have existing water features been incorporated (for example as an

amenity and/or for site drainage) in the design of the project?
Client
Design
Construct
20

Scope-out
Guidance
This question can be scoped out for marine and offshore projects or if there are no
existing water features present on or near the site.
Question
Guidance
Incorporation of water features can provide amenity benefit, but water features that are
incorporated into the project must form an integral part of the design and not reduce the
ecological or environmental quality of the water feature.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence needs to be appropriate to the type of scheme and could include drawings or
photographs showing how existing features have been incorporated.
94
CEEQUAL Ltd
7.4.3
14 pts
CAPTURING RUN-OFF FOR BENEFICIAL USE

Is there evidence that the project team has made provision for
capturing run-off for beneficial use on the project or nearby and, if
appropriate, have those provisions actually been incorporated in
the completed project.
Client
Design
Construct

Scope-out
Guidance
this question will depend on the nature, scale, location and context of the project, for
example on a refurbishment project that cannot affect the drainage arrangements.
Question
Guidance
Flood risk from new developments can be reduced by keeping the number of sealed surfaces
requiring drainage to a minimum (for example by using permeable paving materials or green
roofs) and by introducing capture of run-off before it reaches the main drainage system.
Sustainable Drainage Systems such as balancing ponds or wetlands are covered in Section 7.3.
However, this question is focusing on capturing run-off for beneficial use, for example in tanks for
non-potable uses on the site. This capture may involve systems included within the wide-ranging
definition of SuDS, but it is the capture for beneficial use that is important here. It is therefore
possible that a project may be able to score both here and in Section 7.3 for the overall system
they implement.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should show what measures (such as the ones mentioned above) have been
incorporated into the design. This could be in the form of drawings, specifications or other
design output documents, with construction records or photographs to demonstrate their
construction.
CEEQUAL Ltd
95
Section 8: Physical resources use & management
8.
PHYSICAL RESOURCES USE AND MANAGEMENT
8.1
Basic principles
Resource Use
The construction industry is the UKs largest consumer of resources, using over 400 million tonnes of material
each year derived from natural resources, such as timber, aggregates, concrete and steel. The industry also
consumes substantial quantities of water. Together the construction materials and water required for projects
can be classed as physical resources. In addition, the construction industry is responsible for around 80 million
tonnes of construction, demolition and excavation waste annually.
In Version 4 of the Manual, Material Use and Waste Management were considered in separate sections
(Sections 8 and 9 respectively), albeit with explicit links between the two. This version of the Manual brings
these two subjects together in a single section along with the Minimising water use sub-section from Section 6:
Water Resources and the Water Environment and Section 7: Energy and Carbon are all brought together to
create a single section on Physical Resources. This reflects a more-holistic consideration of resource use in
the context of construction. More-efficient use of physical resources makes a major contribution to reducing the
environmental impacts of construction including reduced demand for landfill and natural resources. It also
contributes to the economic efficiency of the sector and of the UK as a whole.
A significant proportion of the environmental impact of construction arises from the use of physical resources
principally through the energy, water and materials consumed in the manufacture, supply and use of
construction products and materials. It is important that proper consideration be given to the responsible
sourcing and use of construction materials, and how they will be dealt with at the end of their lifetime. Similarly,
consideration must be given to maximising resource efficiency and minimising material consumption. Any waste
that arises should be managed responsibly and in accordance with prevailing legislation.
There are many opportunities during the various stages of a civil engineering or public realm project to influence
the supply and use of materials. There are also opportunities to conserve the use of physical resources through
the reduction, re-use and recycling of waste materials. Identifying and implementing opportunities to use
physical resources more-efficiently and reduce waste must be adopted at the earliest possible stage in the
project cycle to ensure the maximum potential benefits are achieved.
This requires all those involved in the project to adopt policies and procedures that encourage the more-efficient
use of physical resources and waste reduction. For example, this includes the Client mandating requirements
through the procurement process (assessed in Section 2), Designers adopting approaches that promote
resource efficient designs and waste reduction at design stage and Contractors actively managing their supply
chains and by adopting technical solutions at the construction stage.
Planned actions, metrics and targeted outcomes should be communicated between the Client and Contractor
and passed down through the supply chain (including design and consultancy teams, sub-contractors, waste
management Contractors and material suppliers) and across all project stages from option identification and
preliminary or outline design through to project completion.
The impacts of the transport of materials are covered in Section 9.
Energy & Carbon
There is now a widespread belief and ever-mounting evidence that pollutants arising from human activities are
largely responsible for global warming and consequent climate change. The burning of fossil fuels and the
consequential release of carbon dioxide in the generation of energy is seen to be particularly important in this
respect. At the 1997 Kyoto Conference, the UK Government, along with most of the developed nations, made a
commitment to reduce emissions of greenhouse gases over the period 2008 to 2012 and this has subsequently
been re-confirmed at later meetings on climate change. The UK Government has set a clear reduction targets
under the Climate Change Act aiming for an 80% reduction in CO2 emissions by 2050 and an interim target of
34% by 2020 both against a baseline of 1990. Under the Climate Change Act, UK carbon budgets are set and
an independent Committee on Climate Change has been established to advise the Government and report on
progress.
In order to achieve these very challenging targets, all industries and individuals will need to reduce dramatically
their overall energy consumption especially that generated by the burning of fossil fuels, and thus dramatically
reduce their carbon emissions. The quantity of carbon emitted through an organisations annual use of energy
in all its forms is commonly referred to as their carbon footprint.
In the building sector, the Code for Sustainable Homes and Part L of the UKs Building Regulations translate
UK Government policy into performance standards for the building industry. Designers therefore have a
responsibility to minimise energy consumption in buildings, based on these new standards and regulations for
96
CEEQUAL Ltd
energy efficiency in buildings. Energy-efficient solutions in design include passive systems using natural light,
air movement and thermal mass, as well as solutions involving energy produced from renewable sources.
There are no equivalents to the Code or Part L for civil engineering, so the challenge is for civil engineering
project teams to consider energy and carbon emissions issues at all stages of their project. This includes:
the energy consumed in the operation of the completed works;

the energy consumed and carbon emitted (both directly and indirectly) in the production and transport
to site of construction materials and components (embodied energy); and
the energy used during design and construction phases.
They may also choose to consider the carbon footprint of the companys overall operations, not just their
projects.
In civil engineering and public realm projects, examples of energy and carbon emission reductions include:
low-energy plant in water or wastewater treatment plants;

optimisation of all processes including dosing of chemicals used in treatments, and thus minimising the
embodied energy in those chemicals;
timing of processes to use energy off-peak;
inclusion of wind-power generation and/or combined heat & power generation in a major development*;
the embedment and use of solar energy for street lighting, parking meters or any small scale or remote
installations*.
* It should be noted that these last two items are low-carbon-emitting energy generation solutions and so will
provide reductions in carbon emissions but not reductions in energy.
It should also be noted that energy issues are also indirectly included in the transport and materials sections
of the CEEQUAL Manual. It is accepted that the same actions on a project may occasionally score twice in
different sections of the CEEQUAL Scheme.
A final introductory point is to stress that the adoption of renewable sources of energy, including electrical
energy, is not an excuse to become profligate with ones energy use. Every kWh of renewably-generated
electricity that is wasted is a kWh that could have been used for something else by someone else, and reduced
their consumption of fossil-fuel-derived electricity.
8.1.1 (M) POLICIES & TARGETS FOR RESOURCE EFFICIENCY

Is there evidence that all those directly engaged in the project have
5
formal corporate-level policies and targets for ensuring physical
resources can be used in the most efficient way in the operation of
the works?
8.1.1 a)
(M)
10 pts
Design
Construct
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score 1 in each stage for each of the following:
Using materials more efficiently;
Reducing waste;
Using water more efficiently;
Using energy efficiently;
Reducing carbon emissions.
Is there evidence that all those directly engaged in the project have
formal corporate-level policies and targets for ensuring physical
resources are used in the most efficient way in the design and
construction process?
8.1.1 b)
(M)
10 pts
8.1.1 c)
(M)
24 pts
Client
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score 1 in each stage for each of the following:
Using materials more efficiently;
Reducing waste;
Using water more efficiently;
Using energy efficiently;
Reducing carbon emissions.
Is there evidence that the policies and targets described in
8
Question 8.1.1 a) and b) have been implemented and monitored on
the project?
If No, score 0. If Yes, score as indicated for each role.
CEEQUAL Ltd
97
Scope-out
Guidance

This question focuses on integrating material, waste and water-specific objectives throughout the
project cycle to demonstrate that good practice has been adopted from the earliest possible
stage.
All organisations are likely to have corporate environmental policies that set out at a high level
their commitments to managing the environmental impacts of their operations and activities.
However, for the purpose of this question an environmental policy is not considered sufficient in
isolation. To score in this question, organisations should be able to demonstrate that they have
adopted specific policies, which have then been translated into specific actions and targets on the
project.
Key issues for Clients to consider include setting corporate objectives and targets for material
use, waste and water use in their operations and, ensuring these are transferred to the project
team in project procurement (appointing Designers and Contractors, tender and contract
documentation) and engaging with the supply chain. WRAP has produced guidance on setting
procurement requirements for waste, water and carbon. A document covering all of these
elements (i.e. guidance for maximising resource efficiency on projects) will be available soon at
http://www.wrap.org.uk/construction/tools_and_guidance/procurement.html.
Question
Guidance
For Designers, this means demonstrating that they are actively working with Clients and
Contractors to identify opportunities and create design solutions that minimise waste and use
materials, energy and water more efficiently, both in operation of the completed project and in the
construction process.
Similarly, Contractors need to demonstrate that corporate policies are being implemented within
the project, including setting requirements for and engaging with their sub-contractors and
suppliers. In common with Clients, Contractors would be expected to have in place measurement,
monitoring and reporting procedures to capture achievements.
For all organisations, corporate reporting is also an important aspect to demonstrate that the
improvements as a result of policies and commitments are being measured and monitored. For
Designers, this means measuring the potential improvement at project level and reporting this at a
corporate level to demonstrate how proactively they consider the issues in their work.
With regards to waste specifically, all organisations involved in the project should be familiar with
the principles of the Halving Waste to Landfill Commitment even though it has now ended. WRAP
are working on a follow-on voluntary agreement, which they are looking to trial on 2011-12 before
launching in 2013. This was a voluntary commitment co-ordinated by WRAP to halve the amount
of construction, demolition and excavation waste going to landfill by 2012 compared to 2008.
Companies who signed up to the Commitment had to develop and implement an Action Plan
identifying specific actions and targets for each organisation. Performance was then reported to
WRAP via an on-line Reporting Portal (using data generated through the SWMP process). The
Halving Waste to Land Commitment helped deliver significant cost savings to those who adopted
it through reducing material purchasing and consumption and reducing waste. It is anticipated that
WRAP will promote future voluntary agreements relating to resource efficiency in the near future.
Evidence could be a copy of specific, formally adopted policies and targets.
Evidence
Guidance
98
For Question 8.1.1 c) evidence could include action plans that demonstrate implementation
of the policies or copies of annual reports (such as an Environmental or CSR report)
demonstrating the measurement of performance against targets.
Additional evidence would be copies of the procurement documentation and contracts
showing these requirements have been cascaded throughout the supply chain and
adopted in the project. Evidence of having signed up to the Halving Waste to Landfill
Commitment (or any other voluntary agreement that might arise, including an Action Plan
and evidence of annual reporting to WRAP would also be appropriate.
CEEQUAL Ltd
8.2
Embodied Impacts
The embodied impacts associated with the production and transportation of materials used to construct
infrastructure projects can be significant and often offer the greatest chance in reducing a projects overall
impact. Embodied impacts can be considered as the sum of inputs required to get the material, component or
product to a particular project.
8.2.1 (M) LIFE-CYCLE ASSESSMENT

Has a life-cycle assessment been undertaken for the project?
Client
Design
Construct
56
If No, score 0.
If only a carbon footprint analysis, score 11.
If a full LCA but only for key construction materials, score 28.
If a full LCA covering all life-cycle stages, score 56.
56 pts
A full life-cycle assessment must include assessment of a range of different environmental

impacts that arise through the full life cycle of the project, including: raw material
extraction, refinement and manufacture, transportation, impacts of the completed project
Scope-out
in use and its eventual decommissioning, disassembly or demolition. It is also possible to
Guidance
restrict the scope of Life-Cycle Assessment (LCA) to just the impacts arising from
materials up to the point it is included in the works. This scope is required to score the
middle level of points in the above question.
The methodology for undertaking a Life-Cycle Analysis is defined in ISO14040: 2006
Environmental management. Life-Cycle Assessment. Principles and framework and ISO14044:
2006 Environmental management. Life-Cycle Assessment. Requirements and guidelines.
This requires data to be collated from each manufacturing company. Over the next few years this
data collection will become easier as companies are required to publish Environmental Product
Declarations in accordance with BS EN 15942: 2011 Sustainability of Construction Works
Environmental Product Declarations Communication format business-to-business and BS EN
15804: 2012 Sustainability of construction works. Environmental product declarations. Core rules
for the product category of construction products.
Question
Guidance
Whilst a carbon footprint analysis is technically a much less comprehensive assessment than an
LCA, it is currently a much more-achievable assessment through use of one of the free
calculators that are available. In addition, raw carbon emissions data is freely available from
Defras Operational Emissions Factors and the Inventory of Carbon and Energy published by the
University of Bath. The Bath database covers around 1800 energy and carbon figures across 35
common classes of construction products and materials. The BRE Green Guide to Specification,
although aimed at the building construction sector, may also be of some assistance. It needs to
be recognised, however, that this type of assessment is leading-edge in civil engineering and
examples will be added to the Manual as they are found.
The UK Environment Agency has developed a carbon calculator for use on construction projects
available at http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/business/sectors/37543.aspx.
The UK Highways Agency also have a number of carbon calculators available for different types
of road project available at http://www.highways.gov.uk/business/31530.aspx.
For guidance on carbon-equivalent measurement, refer to ENCORD CO2 Measurement Protocol
at www.encord.org/?page_id=260.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a life-cycle assessment report or equivalent, or outputs from an

appropriate software tool.
CEEQUAL Ltd
99
8.2.2 (M) IMPLEMENTING REDUCTIONS IDENTIFIED IN THE LCA

What percentage of the reductions identified in the life-cycle
assessment undertaken in Question 8.2.1 has subsequently been
incorporated in the project?
Client
Design
Construct
56
If under 10%, score 0.

If 10% to <20%, score 9.
If 20% to <40%, score 18.
If 40% to <60%, score 27.
If 60% to <80%, score 36.
If above 80%, score 45.
Score an additional 11 for demonstration that the best LCA option
was implemented.
56 pts
Scope-out
Guidance

It is acknowledged that it is difficult to measure precisely the implementation of reductions. The
key focus of this question is assessing what the project team (including the Client) have done with
the knowledge learnt from the LCA and how they have balanced these issues to deliver improved
environmental performance overall.
Question
Guidance
The scoring scale has been set as percentage reduction in acknowledgement of the fact that
much industry decision making is based purely on carbon reduction. If a full LCA has been
completed then a degree of interpretation may have to be applied to the scale to assess how
much of what could be done has been done this should be mutually agreed between the
Assessor and Verifier. A final level of points is available if it can be demonstrated that the best
LCA option was implemented; evidence for this is likely to require formal value engineering
reports or design meeting minutes recording the rationale for the decisions being made.
It is accepted that there may be practical difficulties in an interactive design process to identify
precisely the scale of the reductions arising from undertaking an assessment. However, it is
intended that savings are only taken from value engineering, redesign or specification changes
and not the impacts associated with parts of a project or scheme that have been removed.
Evidence
Guidance
8.3
Evidence will need to reflect the points earned, and should include project records such
as minutes, technical reports and/or value engineering reports showing to what extent
the results of the assessment have influenced the choice of materials, components and
design solution.
Design for resource efficiency
Optimising the use of materials minimises the amount of new materials required on a project and maximises the
use of materials already available on site. This minimises waste production and reduces collection and disposal
costs. Applying the principles of materials resource efficiency will generally lead to the most cost-effective and
environmentally sustainable method of construction. WRAP considers resource efficiency to encompass the
following elements with respect to materials use in construction and refurbishment:
Materials quantity and wastage;

Recycled content;
Embodied carbon;
Water use;
Embodied water;
Life span (such as durability);
End of life potential (such as reuse and
recyclability); and
Resource scarcity & security.
The biggest opportunities to influence material use, waste reduction and resource efficiency occur through
decisions made at the design stage as these determine the approach that will be adopted at the construction
stage. The overall concept of how best to address resource efficiency is still being developed. In the absence of
a defined methodology it is appropriate to use WRAPs Designing out Waste principles. There are five basic
principles that can be applied:
Design for waste efficient procurement.
Design for reuse and recovery.
Design for deconstruction and flexibility.
Design for off-site construction.
Design for materials optimisation.
100
CEEQUAL Ltd
Applying these principles throughout the project cycle ensures that design solutions identified at an early stage
are embedded into the project and fully implemented. WRAPs Designing out Waste: A design team guide for
civil engineering provides guidance on the key principles that Designers can use during the design process and
how these principles can be applied to civil engineering projects
http://www.wrap.org.uk/construction/tools_and_guidance/designing_out_waste/dow_civil_eng.html.
Monitoring the quantity of material specified at the design stage and comparing this with the material used
during construction can provide performance indicators, which enable the assessment of the effectiveness of
material reduction measures. This also provides retrospective information for the design team to feed into future
projects.
8.3.1 (M) MATERIAL RESOURCE EFFICIENCY PLANNING
Client
Was a plan drawn up that identifies opportunities for improving

material resource efficiency and reducing waste using the five key
principles?
Design
Construct
10
If No, score 0. If Yes, score as follows:

If it considers design for reuse and recovery, score 2.
If it considers design for off-site construction, score 2.
If it considers design for materials optimisation, score 2.
If it considers design for waste efficient procurement, score 2.
If it considers design for deconstruction and flexibility, score 2.
10 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
This question embodies the five key principles that can be adopted to improve material resource
efficiency and reduce waste through design. The principles should be applied as early as possible
in the design life cycle to give the maximum scope for achieving efficiencies. They also need to be
applied throughout the project life cycle to ensure that the potential improvements identified are
achieved during construction. Therefore, the maximum score for this question can only be
achieved when the incorporation of all five principles are clearly demonstrated. It is acknowledged
that not all of these principles are applicable to all projects, for example, where off-site
construction is just not possible. However, a score can still be achieved where it is shown that the
principle has been considered even if it was then discounted.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a specific materials plan or a specific consideration recorded within

design meeting records. It could also include the reports from a Designing out Waste
workshop or the outputs from WRAPs Designing out Waste tool. Implementation of the
recommendations could be demonstrated by incorporation into specifications and
drawings, or through physical evidence such as photographs.
Evidence could also include data quantifying material savings or waste reductions, which
could include decisions and information recorded in the Site Waste Management Plan.
8.3.2 (M) MATERIAL RESOURCE EFFICIENCY IMPLEMENTATION

16 pts
Has this plan been implemented and monitored?
Client
Design
Construct
16

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Implementation needs to demonstrate that that practices have been implemented that clearly
demonstrate material resource efficiencies and/or waste reductions.
Evidence
Guidance
Implementation of the plan could be demonstrated by incorporation into specifications,

drawings and materials orders, or through construction records and physical evidence
such as photographs.
CEEQUAL Ltd
101
8.3.3
CUT AND FILL OPTIMISATION
12 pts
Has an assessment been made at design stage to ensure

optimisation of cut and fill to reduce the quantity of excavated
material to be taken off site?
Client
Design
Construct
12

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out only on projects where there is no excavation or in situations where, for
example, a structure such as a tank is completely underground and there are no options
on size (for example storm tanks).
Cut and fill is the term used to describe the whole process of profiling of the landform for the
project excavation in some parts, deposition and compaction of excavated and/or imported
material in others. The balancing of these two elements leads to minimisation of the import or
export of materials to and from the project. This balancing can be done by computer modelling or
other, more-traditional methods.
Question
Guidance
Clearly, this question is most applicable to road and rail schemes, and sometimes to airports and
industrial estate development. However, it does need to be considered in any project where there
is major excavation. In particular, it applies to structures that are semi-buried (such as service
reservoirs) where there may be scope to balance cut and fill with how much of the tank is below
ground.
Note that, in this question excavated material does not include buried structures that are
demolished. The re-use of this material is considered in Question 8.7.6.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of calculations showing the cut and fill balance and/or
contract drawings with mapped out areas for cut and fill and/or contract drawings with
mapped out areas for cut and fill.
8.3.4
DURABILITY AND LOW MAINTENANCE
12 pts
Is there evidence that durability and low maintenance of structures

and components have been actively considered in design and
specification?
Client
Design
Construct
12

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out only if there are no structures or major components in the project.
Extending the lifetime of a structure is likely to have considerable environmental benefits as it
avoids the environmental impacts associated with later refurbishment or the building of a new
structure. In the same way, a low maintenance structure reduces the environmental impacts
relating to maintenance and is likely to enhance the structures lifetime. Admittedly, there are likely
to be trade-offs in this area, for example between more-durable paint systems and
environmentally damaging treatments.
Question
Guidance
It is important to recognise that, in the context of CEEQUAL, what is being looked for in the
assessment of these options is consideration of the environmental cost, and a judgement about
which option has the greatest lifetime environmental benefit and least adverse impact. This may
correlate with reduced expenditure in terms of the whole life costs of the structure. Synergies
between financial and environmental savings will present a particularly compelling case to Clients.
It is essential that the desired lifespan of a built structure is reflected in every detail of a structure.
Often durability is compromised by minor components within it that have a shorter design life than
the structure itself and that were specified without bearing the overall objective in mind.
Evidence
Guidance
102
Evidence should be found in the specifications or in the report of a life-cycle costing

analysis or a value-engineering project.
CEEQUAL Ltd
8.3.5 (M) LONG-TERM PLANNED MAINTENANCE

15 pts
Client
Is there evidence that long-term planned maintenance has been

considered properly in the design process?
Design
Construct
15

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
This should cover, at a minimum, the nature and practicality of work expected to be needed, the
timescales for this work, and the provision of safe access for maintenance to be carried out. It
should be written in a plan for maintenance for the project, and delivered to the Client.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be found in the specifications, a HAZOP assessment (or similar), in a

contract maintenance schedule or in the form of a maintenance plan to be handed to the
Client or managing agent.
8.3.6
SOIL MANAGEMENT
18 pts
Client
Has a soil management plan been prepared and implemented?
Design
Construct
18

Scope-out
Guidance
Note that consideration of soil management is covered in Section 4: Land Use and Landscape
Question
Guidance
The Defra document Code of Practice for the sustainable use of soils on construction sites
recommends undertaking a Soils Resource Survey prior to commencing work and preparing a
Soil Management Plan to be implemented during construction. The Code of Practice requires that
a Soils Resource Plan should be produced on all construction sites where re-useable reserves of
topsoil and/or subsoil have been identified by the Soils Resource Survey. The code is available
from Defra at http://www.defra.gov.uk/environment/quality/land/soil/built-environ/documents/codeof-practice.pdf.
Topsoil is correctly stored in stockpiles no higher than 2 metres. To avoid compaction of the soil,
stockpiles must not be driven on by heavy machinery. Vegetating long-term stockpiles with
suitable plants (for example, mustard or annual lupines) may help prevent dust blow and erosion,
silt run-off, and should assist in preventing invasive and/or noxious weeds from invading the soil.
However, the extent to which this is appropriate, and which plants should or should not be used
depends on the intended use of the topsoil. Note: stockpiles should not be located within 10
metres of a watercourse. (See BS3882: 2007 Specification for topsoil and requirements for use.)
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be the results of the Soil Resource Survey and a copy of the Soil
Management Plan. The Plan should contain detailed instructions on soil handling for the
relevant project (not a general statement). Evidence could also include a soil handling and
management strategy, or minutes of site meetings referring to the handling and storage of
topsoil.
8.3.7
BENEFICIAL RE-USE OF TOPSOIL

Has all topsoil been re-used beneficially as topsoil on the site or on
a site within a reasonable distance*?
Design
Construct
If No, score 0.
If all beneficially re-used off site, score 2.
If majority (over 50%) beneficially re-used on site, score 4.
If all beneficially re-used on site, score 9.
9 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Client
CEEQUAL Ltd
103
Refer to Question 8.9.2 if the topsoil is to be or has been moved off site because waste
management controls may apply.
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
* Topsoil is an organic material and is only re-used beneficially if layers are not applied too deep
as this would destroy its structure. In addition, certain types of habitats actually require very little
or no topsoil at all. Re-use on site for the sake of it, in places and at a thickness that is not
required, would therefore not be beneficial' re-use. What represents a reasonable distance must
be judged in the context of the project and its location. It might be 15km in a built-up area, but up
to 100km if the site generating the surplus topsoil is in a remote area.
Evidence could be some form of calculation to support the points awarded. This could be a
comparison of design calculations to waste transfer notes. The definition of reasonable
distance needs to be mutually agreed between the Assessor and Verifier.
Future deconstruction and flexibility

Designing for deconstruction and flexibility will ensure that as many as possible of the components from a
works or structure that has come to the end of its useful life can be re-used or recycled. This is addressed in
Question 8.2.1 where the assessment is made of whether this issue was considered in the early stages of the
project and in Question 8.3.1 where planning for materials resource efficiency is considered.
Structures and components that can be easily dismantled will yield more materials for high-grade reclamation.
Minimising the use of composite forms will avoid the need to process the component in order to separate the
materials for re-use. Labelling of components, particularly plastics, to identify the materials used, will also make
recycling more-effective. In some cases, there will be a trade-off between avoiding the use of composite forms
and minimising material use.
CIRIA has produced guidance on this issue (Design for deconstruction: principles of design to facilitate re-use &
recycling [C607, 2003]) and WRAPs Designing out Waste: A design team guide for civil engineering also
covers this key principle.
8.3.8
FUTURE DISASSEMBLY / DE-CONSTRUCTION

What percentage by volume of components or pre-fabricated units
used can be easily separated on disassembly/de-construction into
material types suitable for recycling?
12 pts
Client
Design
Construct
12
Under 15%, score 0.

If 15% to <30%, score 2.
If 30% to <45%, score 4.
If 45% to <60%, score 6.
If 60% to <75%, score 8.
If 75% to <90%, score 10.
If 90% and above, score 12.
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Examples for suitable material types may include bricks, blocks, stone and concrete, treated and
untreated timber, glass, PVC, different types of plastic, metal, paper and cardboard, and
components (for example, sinks, toilets, radiators).
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence needs to substantiate the percentage being claimed. This can be calculated by
any appropriate means that assesses how materials are utilised and combined within the
works. The volume of materials that contribute to 80% of the total by value should be used
as a basis for the calculations.
104
CEEQUAL Ltd
8.3.9 (M) MATERIALS REGISTER
Client
Design
Has a materials register been provided to the Client or future

managing agent at hand-over that identifies main material types to
facilitate recycling during disassembly or de-construction?
5 pts
Construct

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence can include a Health & Safety File, provided this has been extended to include
information about material types that will enable recycling on demolition.
8.4
Design for reduced energy consumption and carbon emissions in

use
Considering energy consumption in use and carbon emissions reduction at design stage can bring significant
long-term environmental (and economic) benefits.
8.4.1 (M) ENERGY & CARBON EMISSIONS REDUCTION
21 pts
Client
Design
Construct
Is there evidence that the design has considered options for

21
reducing both the energy consumption and carbon emissions of the
project during operation, including the option of designing-out the
need for energy-consuming equipment and the energy
requirements in maintenance?
Scope-out
Guidance

Examples include considering the effects of ground modulations or surface resistance. The
Victoria line in London, for instance, was designed to have each station on a hump, thus helping
trains to accelerate when leaving and slowing them down when approaching a station (in addition
to reducing the length of stairs and escalators). The energy saving per individual train journey
may only have been small, but accumulated over many years, this small measure will have had
and is still having a very large impact.
Question
Guidance
Equally, the quest for reductions in energy consumption, from whatever source, can and should
include the option of simply not including energy-consuming equipment, or installation of smart
technologies, such as lighting of car parks that comes on only when people are using it, or
escalators that stop when no-one is using them. Pumping energy can be significantly reduced
through avoiding many sharp bends in pipe runs and optimisation of pipe sizes.
Energy use in maintenance is equally important to consider. This can include frequency and type
of maintenance required and accessibility issues, as well as overall durability and lifespan.
It needs to be stressed that if a question of priority between energy consumption and carbon
emissions are highlighted in these studies, CEEQUAL aims to achieve an overall reduction in
energy consumption, whether renewably generated or not, whilst reduction of carbon emissions is
undoubtedly important, CEEQUAL considers the inefficient use of renewable energy as a moresignificant issue and would prioritise embodied energy over carbon if a situation of conflicting
interests ever arose.
Evidence
Guidance
If an LCA has been completed the evidence here will be a sub-set of that provided in
Question 8.2.1. If an LCA has not been completed then evidence could include project
records and/or minutes of project team meetings.
CEEQUAL Ltd
105
8.4.2
IMPLEMENTATION OF REDUCTIONS
Client
Is there evidence of appropriate* measures having been

incorporated to reduce energy consumption and carbon emissions
in use and what percentage of the recommended energy
consumption reduction has been saved?
35 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Design
Construct
35

If 10% to <20%, score 7.
If 20% to <40%, score 14.
If 40% to <60%, score 21.
If 60% to <80%, score 28.
Scope out if evidence to Question 8.4.1 shows that there are no energy-in-use issues to be
considered (not even maintenance).
* If a full LCA has been completed in Question 8.2.1, appropriate in this context means those
measures that contribute to the LCA and not necessarily the lowest energy solution.
Question
Guidance
In demonstrating implementation of measures, it must be demonstrated that the original baseline

was design to current project norms and not including unnecessarily high-energy consuming
equipment. In future versions it is anticipated that this question will be re-focussed to measure
improvement from current industry norms but, at this point, these are readily available to give a
robust baseline.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include project records minutes of project team meetings, technical
reports, and/or drawings.
8.4.3
OPPORTUNITIES FOR RENEWABLE / LOW-CARBON / ZEROCARBON ENERGY
11 pts
Is there evidence that the design has explored opportunities for the
incorporation of energy from renewable and/or low- or zero-carbon
sources and thus a reduction in carbon emissions?
Client
Design
Construct
11

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out on projects where energy consumption in use is non-existent (for example, a
flood defence).
Question
Guidance
It is important to note that a project does not have to be an energy-consuming works for it to be
worth investigating the inclusion of renewables, nor does the installed capacity have to just match
the demand of the works in question, especially if other consumers are close by. The UK
Government currently have a range of financial incentives for promoting the increased use of
renewables including the Feed-in-Tariffs (FITs) and the Renewable Heat Incentive (RHI).
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include project records minutes of project team meetings, technical
reports, and/or drawings.
8.4.4
INCORPORATING RENEWABLE / LOW-CARBON / ZEROCARBON ENERGY

To what extent has energy from renewable and/or low- or zerocarbon sources been incorporated in the scheme where
appropriate and what percentage of the identified potential
renewable energy generation has been implemented?
30 pts
106
Client
Design
Construct
30

If 10% to <20%, score 6.
If 20% to <40%, score 12.
If 40% to <60%, score 18.
If 60% to <80%, score 24.
CEEQUAL Ltd
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out where it was considered (under Question 8.4.3) and found to be not possible or
inappropriate.
As with previous questions, in this section it should be stressed that the measurement has to be
carried out from the baseline of current industry norms and not an artificial design.
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
8.5
As with Question 8.4.3, it is important to note that a project does not have to be an energy
consuming works for it to be worth investigating the inclusion of renewables, nor does the
installed capacity have to just match the demand of the works in question, especially if other
consumers are close by.
Evidence could include drawings, specifications or photographs.
Energy and carbon performance on site
On many projects, for example wastewater treatment plants, the energy consumption during operation is very
much more-significant than the consumption on site during construction. However, controlling energy
consumption during construction is still important and, for many other kinds of civil engineering project for
example unlit rural roads, flood defence schemes and canals there is little or no in-use consumption, so
energy consumption during construction becomes the significant energy issue on that project.
One of the main contributors to greenhouse gas emissions during the construction process is the use of
construction plant, together with the transport impacts of delivering materials to site and staff travel. The latter
are dealt with in the Section 9: Transport, as well as forming part of a life-cycle assessment for materials, dealt
with in Question 8.2.1. This section therefore focuses on the energy and carbon impacts of construction plant
and machinery.
The use of the correct plant for the job, only running the plant when needed, selecting more-efficient plant
where available, and even designing out the need for energy-consuming construction plant will all assist in
improving the energy performance of the construction works. Best Available Techniques Not Entailing
Excessive Cost (BATNEEC) or Best Available Technique (BAT) should be in evidence in respect of plant and
methods for carrying out work in order to reduce energy use (and other environmental impacts for example
noise). Similarly, good programming of the introduction and use of certain types of plant, and where to position
them on site, can avoid waste of energy through plant transport, excessive start-up and shut-down, premature
arrival on site and unnecessary running. See references to carbon calculators from the Environment Agency
and Highways Agency under Question 8.2.1.
8.5.1 (M) ENERGY CONSUMPTION CONSIDERATION DURING DESIGN

8.5.1 a)
(M)
20 pts
Is there evidence that the Designer has considered the energy

consumption of the project during construction?
Client
Design
Construct
20
8.5.1 b)
27 pts
Is there evidence that the Designer has incorporated appropriate

27
measures to reduce energy consumption during construction where
feasible?
Scope-out
Guidance
Question 8.5.1 b) can be scoped out if there were genuinely no opportunities identified.
Question
Guidance
It is acknowledged that the responses to these questions are going to be based on estimated
savings and, in many cases, the savings may be anecdotal rather than quantified.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of design records or value engineering reports considering
the construction methods, such as the size of components to enable efficient lifting and
placing as well as the amount of on-site processing or handling of materials.
CEEQUAL Ltd
107
ENERGY CONSUMPTION CONSIDERATION BY
8.5.2 (M) CONTRACTOR

8.5.2 a)
(M)
16 pts
Client
Design
Is there evidence that the Contractor has considered measures to

reduce the energy consumption and associated carbon emissions
of the project during construction and have these been
incorporated through an energy management plan or equivalent?
Construct
16

8.5.2 b)
(M)
22 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Have the measures in the plan been monitored throughout

construction stage and have the measures been achieved.
22
If No, score 0.
If monitored, score 18.
If achieved, score 22.
Whereas using energy-efficient plant reduces energy consumption and carbon emissions, just
using renewable energy only reduces carbon unless there is evidence of an energy efficiency
programme, such as heating or cooling of on-site cabins.
Question
Guidance
The primary purpose of Questions 8.5.1 and 8.5.2 is to reward the reduction energy and carbon
during construction. It should be noted that if the team have done a full LCA and scored it in
Question 8.2.1 then these issues may well have already have been considered, if so then the
same evidence can be used.
Monitoring energy use and carbon emissions can highlight differences in utilisation and control of
energy, thus providing data for comparison and enabling energy savings in future.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence can include records showing consideration of energy issues in site planning and
demonstration that energy use and/or carbon emissions are assessed and then monitored,
including evidence of actions to reduce consumption and emissions as appropriate. This
could also include the setting of targets.
Evidence could also show use of equipment to proactively manage consumption and
emissions, such as timers and passive infrared sensors.
8.5.3 (M) CONSTRUCTION PLANT - SELECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Has the selection and procurement/hiring of construction plant
been influenced by consideration of their energy efficiency, energy
type or carbon emissions?
9 pts
Client
Design
Construct
And,
Is there evidence that construction plant and ancillary equipment
has been maintained to maximise fuel efficiency and minimise
carbon emissions?
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Considering the energy consumption of construction plant and machinery before purchase will
ensure that the better environmental option can be chosen, and savings on fuel can be made in
the long run. Regular maintenance of plant and machinery will ensure fuel efficiency and prolong
the life of machines and power tools.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be contract specifications and other procurement documents, or plant

documentation (for example, records of regular maintenance and emission testing).
108
CEEQUAL Ltd
RENEWABLE / LOW-CARBON / ZERO-CARBON ENERGY
8.5.4 (M) DURING CONSTRUCTION
Client
Design
Has energy from renewable and/or low- or zero-carbon resources

been considered during construction?
8.5.4 a)
(M)
6 pts
Construct

What percentage of the savings from the above considerations
have been implemented?
8.5.4 b)
9 pts
If none, score 0.
If 0% to 5%, score 3.
If >5% to 10%, score 6.
If >10%, score 9.
Scope-out
Guidance
Question 8.5.4 a) is Mandatory. Question 8.5.4 b) can be scoped out only in the unlikely
event that consideration of this issue identified no useful application of renewable and/or
low- or zero-carbon resources.
As with Questions 8.4.3., it is important to note that a project does not have to be an energy
consuming works for it to be worth investigating the use of renewables in the construction stage.
Measures should be appropriate to the scale and nature of the project, for example, one solar
panel on a multi-cabin site office for a multi-million pound project would definitely be insufficient.
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
If the implementation includes use of blended biofuels, then the calculated savings should be
based on Annex 9 of the Defra Guidelines to Conversion Factors for Company Reporting currently
found at http://archive.defra.gov.uk/environment/business/reporting/pdf/110819-guidelines-ghgconversion-factors.pdf, with the methodology explained at
http://www.defra.gov.uk/publications/files/pb13625-emission-factor-methodology-paper110905.pdf.
Evidence showing the source of site energy is needed. This could be copies of agreements
with electricity suppliers showing use of certified fully-renewably-sourced green tariffs or
photographs showing use of alternative energy sources (such as wind turbines, solar
panels, or small scale combined heat & power).
Evidence needs to show that the use of renewable, low- or zero-carbon energy is more
than a token effort.
8.6
Water use
Water use in the UK and Ireland is increasing. Some parts of the UK are becoming drier, and are experiencing
increasing pressure on water resources. Potential future climate change and a predicted substantial rise in
population will only exacerbate the demand for water, as will moves to increase the UKs food production to
improve levels of self-sufficiency. The Governments policies on Sustainable Development (1999, 2005) and
Sustainable Construction (2000, 2008) identify water use during construction and in completed works as key
issues for the construction industry.
Minimising water usage is a widely accepted way of reducing human impact on water resources. At design
stage, designs can be adapted for minimising water usage during operation and ought to take account of longterm water requirements. Designs for utilisation of greywater* and rainwater should be encouraged if
appropriate.
* Greywater is defined as water collected after use in washing machines, sinks etc that is not suitable for
drinking but can be used for irrigation, toilet flushing etc. This always excludes sewage.
Water associated with the construction stage can be attributed to direct water use (i.e. water used by
construction teams for site activities) or indirect or embodied water use typically associated with construction
products and materials. The embodied water, or water footprint of a product, is the total volume of freshwater
used to produce the product, summed over the various steps of the production chain. The water footprint of a
product refers not only to the total volume of water used; it also refers to where and when the water is used.
Training on these issues should be encouraged to ensure knowledge of new designs and benefits of
conservation; on site, toolbox talks on water conservation have been found to be invaluable.
CEEQUAL Ltd
109
8.6.1 (M) EMBODIED WATER

8.6.1 a)
(M)
39 pts
8.6.1 b)
(M)
39 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Client
Has an assessment been made at design stage considering the

embodied water in the materials required during construction?
Design
Construct
39

Have the outcomes of the assessment been implemented
39

The interest in the concept of a water footprint and the accompanying methods and tools for its
assessment is rooted in the recognition that human impacts on freshwater systems can ultimately
be linked to human consumption and that issues like water shortages and pollution can be better
understood and addressed by considering production and supply chains as a whole. Therefore,
information on the embodied water of construction products can provide information to facilitate
decisions that can help reduce the overall environmental impact of a project.
Question
Guidance
The water footprint concept and its use to inform materials selection is, however, still relatively
new. Organisations such as the Water Footprint Network (www.waterfootprint.org) have published
useful guidance documents, including The Water Footprint Assessment Manual: Setting the
Global Standard (A. Hoekstra and A. Chapagain et al, 2011). ISO is also in the process of
developing of a new standard to provide internationally harmonized metrics for water footprints to
complement existing standards on life-cycle assessment.
Existing data that could be used to inform a study into the embodied water of construction
materials can be found in sources such as the BRE Green Guide to Specification and
Environmental Product Declarations.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence would include information gathered on the embodied water of the construction
products and materials required for the project, either from product or material suppliers.
It would also include documentary evidence that decisions on material or product choice
have been made on the basis of embodied water.
8.6.2
WATER CONSUMPTION DURING OPERATION
8.6.2 a)
25 pts
Have the potential impacts on water resources of the operation and

25
maintenance of the completed project been actively considered
during design?
Client
Design
Construct

8.6.2 b)
39 pts
Have measures to conserve water and reduce water consumption

during operation and maintenance of the completed project been
included in the design?
39

8.6.2 c)
39 pts
Have the measures referred to in Question 8.6.2 b) been

incorporated in the works?
39

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Scope out on projects where water consumption in use is not an issue, for example a flood
defence bank.
Measures to conserve water and reduce water consumption during operation and maintenance
could include the use of water efficient or moisture controlled irrigation systems, the use of
collected rainwater or greywater as an alternative non-potable water supply, or the installation of a
leak detection system.
Options to mitigate the projects impact on the water environment could also include using
captured water for energy generation, passive cooling, and/or district heating.
This consideration of these issues during design could be part of a Project Environmental
110
CEEQUAL Ltd
Management Plan or can be included in a separate document. The review should assess
questions such as:
Evidence
Guidance
What water use does the project entail?

Are suitable water resources available?
Are new water resources needed?
Are they sustainable?
Does the project endanger security of water supply to existing users?
Evidence of the design consideration could include assessment of predicted water use,
review of availability of water resources or a copy of consultation with the relevant water
authority regarding water supply and resource availability.
At design stage, evidence is required of investigations into water conservation measures.
This could be in various documented forms (such as notes of brainstorming sessions, and
notes, specifications or drawings showing measures incorporated into the design).
8.6.3 (M) WATER CONSUMPTION DURING CONSTRUCTION
8.6.3 a)
(M)
26 pts
Client
Design
Construct
Have specific and measurable requirements to measure, monitor

26
and minimise the consumption of mains or abstracted water during
construction been included in the project brief and the procurement
documentation (such as Expressions of Interest, Pre-Qualification
Questionnaires and/or Invitation to Tender)?
8.6.3 b)
(M)
39 pts
Have formal project-level policies and identified measurable targets

for reducing water usage during construction been adopted; and
Has a plan to measure, monitor and minimise the consumption of
mains, tankered or abstracted water used during the construction
process been produced?
39

Has the plan been implemented?
8.6.3 c)
(M)
45 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
45
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score a maximum of 45 as follows:
If efficient use of water in site facilities, score 11.
If efficient use of water in construction activities, score 11.
If capturing runoff for reuse during construction, score 23.
None Questions are Mandatory. If part a) is not scored by the Client or Designer, the
Contractor can gain the points indicated by preparing their own plan.
A proactive approach to reducing water usage in construction should begin at the procurement
stage and it is the responsibility of the Client to ensure that requirements are set for water use in
the construction process.
The Strategy for Sustainable Construction (HM Government, 2008) included a number of targets
related to the more-efficient use of water, including a target to reduce by 20% water use in the
manufacturing and construction stage by 2012 compared to 2008 usage.
Improving the efficiency of water use in construction follows the following hierarchy:
Question
Guidance
eliminate water wastage on site;

improve efficiency of water-using processes; and
offset consumption of mains water with alternative sources such as rainwater harvesting.
Key water using processes on construction sites are considered to be:
CEEQUAL Ltd
site cabins and temporary accommodation;

general site activities including tool washing;
wet trades, such as brickwork, screeding, concreting and plastering;
groundworks, including grouting and drilling;
dust suppression, including road and wheel washing;
111
hydro-demolition;
cleaning of tools and plant equipment, lorry washing; and
commissioning and testing of building plant and services.
Activities where it is thought the majority of water wastage occurs include:
general dust suppression, suppression on site roads and wheel washes;

hydro-demolition with high pressure water;
lorry wash out;
wash out of ready mixed concrete wagons;
site and general cleaning;
specialist and high pressure cleaning; and
commissioning plant and services.
At the procurement stage, requirements can be set to minimise water use during construction
from mains and abstracted sources. For example, requirements could include the re-use of water
from settlement lagoons as a non-potable water supply for damping down during dusty periods.
See guidance at www.strategicforum.org.uk/water.shtml.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a copy of documentation (such as the Project Environment Policy)

showing that the Client has formally adopted policies and targets and copies of reports
(such as Environmental or Corporate Responsibility report) demonstrating the
measurement of performance against targets.
The Client would also need to provide copies of the procurement documentation and
contracts showing these requirements have been cascaded throughout its supply chain.
8.7
Responsible sourcing, re-use and recycling of materials
The sourcing, manufacture, use and disposal of construction materials can have a significant impact on local
and global environments from which they are obtained or in which they are produced. The issue is complex and
it is not within the scope of the CEEQUAL Scheme to identify which materials are less environmentally
damaging or more-environmentally beneficial than others.
The concept of responsible sourcing within the UK is developing at a rapid pace, most notably with the BRE
Framework Standard for the Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products (BES 6001: 2009). This document
provides criteria against which environmental management, as well as social and economic facets of
sustainable construction products, can be assessed and independently certified. Other certification schemes
are being developed that are completely unrelated to the BRE standard. At the current time, only BES6001based schemes or those that are third party accredited as being compliant to BS8902: 2009 can be considered
as appropriate evidence of responsible sourcing. This is a rapidly evolving subject so this guidance may be
updated regularly in Manual version updates.
Note that, whilst an EMS certified as compliant with ISO14001 may provide a very good tool for assessing and
improving an organisations environmental performance, using suppliers with an ISO14001 certificate or
equivalent (such as BS8555 or EMAS) does not guarantee that their products are less environmentally
damaging than materials from suppliers without one.
The following common construction materials can already be actively considered in this section concrete,
aggregates, asphalt, steel, concrete products and timber. More products are being certified regularly and there
are a number of sector schemes currently being developed so this list is not exhaustive.
There are many opportunities during the various stages of a civil engineering or public realm project to influence
the supply and use of materials through design, specification, selection, supply chain management, storage
and use. There are also opportunities to conserve the use of material resources through the reduction, re-use
and recycling of waste materials.
8.7.1 (M) RESPONSIBLE SOURCING OF MATERIALS

8.7.1 a)
(M)
18 pts
112
Is there evidence that the responsible sourcing of materials has

been considered and specified prior to placing the order?
Client
Design
Construct
18
CEEQUAL Ltd
To what extent has the specification for responsible sourcing been

achieved?
8.7.1 b)
(M)
20 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
20
If not at all, score 0.

If less than 50% by volume achieved, score 5.
If 50 to 80% by volume achieved, score 10.
If greater than 80% by volume achieved, score 20.
Responsible sourcing of materials covers a range of issues, including organisational management
systems, supply chain management systems and a range of social and environmental issues
(including greenhouse gas emissions, material traceability and life-cycle assessment).
Question
Guidance
The emphasis of these questions has changed from the previous version of the Manual to reward
specifying and achieving responsible sourcing rather than just considering it. The scoring also
rewards the consideration and specification of responsibly sourced materials at earlier stages in
the projects lifecycle to reflect the greater influence that can be exerted at these stages.
Consideration to purchase materials from sustainable sources may be given via the specification
of materials from the Client and/or Designer. Implementation will be in accordance with sectorspecific schemes, contract requirements and/or the specification.
Evidence in relation to Question 8.7.1 a) could be statement in Client tender brief or
contract documents, record of discussions.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence in relation to Question 8.7.1 b) could be a comparison of specification

requirements to overall material purchase, sub-contract documents with general material
suppliers, or a declaration from the supplier (usually provided as certificates). In any case,
some substantiation of the specification being claimed needs to be provided. At the
current time, only BES 6001-based schemes or schemes that are third party accredited as
being compliant with BS8902: 2009 can be considered suitable sector-specific schemes.
8.7.2 (M) LOCALLY-SOURCED AND RECYCLED MATERIALS

8.7.2 a)
(M)
5 pts
Has the Client required consideration be given to the use of locally

sourced and recycled material?
8.7.2 b)
(M)
5 pts
Have the Designer and Contractor researched all locally available

material sources, including recycled materials?
8.7.2 c)
(M)
5 pts
Have the Designer and Contractor adapted the designs and

specifications to allow for their use, where appropriate?
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
Client
Design
Construct

5

5

The traditional approach of using standard designs and specification clauses can lead to the
exclusion of acceptable locally sourced and more-sustainable material choices. Good practice of
actively seeking sustainable local materials on a site-specific basis should be encouraged.
WRAP has produced a range of resources for recycled content in construction products
http://rcproducts.wrap.org.uk/ along with the AggRegain Specifier
http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/specifier/index.html.
Evidence could be the Clients tender brief, design briefs or reports from research into
materials sourcing.
CEEQUAL Ltd
113
8.7.3
SOURCING OF TIMBER
8.7.3 a)
6 pts
Is there evidence that the highest possible proportion of timber and

6
timber products used in the permanent works has been sourced
from legal and sustainably managed sources with recognised
timber labelling (Forest Stewardship Council or equivalent), or from
re-use?
Client
Design
Construct

If 40% to <80%, score 3.
8.7.3 b)
6 pts
Is there evidence that the highest possible proportion of timber and

timber products used in the temporary works has been sourced
from legal and sustainably managed sources with recognised
timber labelling (Forest Stewardship Council or equivalent), or from
re-use?

If 40% to <80%, score 3.
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out if no timber is used in the works.

It is reasonably widely accepted that timber is an environmentally beneficial material, provided it is
derived from a sustainably managed source and not derived from a timber mine (the term used
to describe a source of timber that is not being replenished). However, as with other construction
materials, the transport of timber can significantly contribute to embodied energy and life-cycle
impacts.
Europe has taken steps to prevent illegal timber being available on the European market from
March 2013 (http://ec.europa.eu/environment/forests/timber_regulation.htm) but NGOs are active
in highlighting both illegal and unsustainable timer use, particularly of tropical hardwoods. Note
also that it is important to ensure beneficial use of timber that had to be felled to enable a project
to proceed, ideally on the project itself, although this is actually scored in Section 8.7.
Question
Guidance
Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certification is the most widely recognised global timber
labelling system. It is acknowledged that there may be other timber certificates that effectively fulfil
the same criteria, and as long as this can be proven, these are acceptable. Other schemes that
can be accepted include Canadian Standard Associations (CSA) and the majority of Programme
for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC), and Sustainable Forestry Initiatives (SFI) for
non-mixed timber. Mixed timber with a PEFC or SFI label has been shown to include nonsustainable timber (http://www.greenpeace.org/international/en/publications/reports/On-TheGround-2011-/). Details of materials recycling, including timber, are available at the WRAP
website, http://www.wrap.org.uk/construction/. Further information can be obtained from the
Timber Research and Development Association who is a centre of excellence for the specification
and use of timber and wood products (www.trada.co.uk) or by referring the central point of
expertise for timber procurement (http://www.cpet.org.uk/uk-government-timber-procurementpolicy).
A single score is given across all three roles/stages, because the Client or Designer may choose
to specify this requirement, rather than just leave the Contractor to choose to do it.
For public bodies there is a mandatory requirement to ensure that all timber is from legal and
sustainable sources. As such, the scoring for schemes with public body Clients included should
be rigorous.
Evidence
Guidance
114
Evidence could be a comparison of specification requirements to overall timber quantities,

sub contract documents with timber suppliers, or a declaration from the timber supplier. In
any case, some substantiation of the percentage being claimed needs to be provided.
Where timber use is scored, certification of the supplier is not sufficient because only
products that are identified on invoices and delivery notes as being from a certified
supplier are complete evidence. Where it is uncertain as to the certification of timber
confirmatory communication from a certified supplier must be obtained.
CEEQUAL Ltd
8.7.4
15 pts
RETENTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES & MATERIALS

What percentage by volume of any existing structures and
materials, such as roads, tanks and pipework, have been retained
and used within the project as opposed to being demolished and
crushed or disposed of?
Client
Design
Construct
15

If 25% to <50%, score 5.
If 50% to <75%, score 10.
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out if no existing structures on site.

Note: This question is about the retention and re-use of existing structures. Any structures that are
demolished, crushed and then re-used on the project are covered in Question in 8.7.7.
The appropriate re-use of structures and parts of structures can significantly reduce the demand
for new construction materials and other environmental burdens resulting from a development.
An assessment of the feasibility of re-using existing structures and materials should have been
carried out as part of the plan required in Question 8.7.5. A pre-demolition audit and other site
surveys will provide information on the existing structures and materials present on site in order to
support decision making around the feasibility of incorporating existing structures and materials
into the project.
Question
Guidance
It is important that these issues are considered at feasibility stage so that the design process can
be focussed on re-use rather than new construction. Actions to re-use or recover existing
structures or materials will also lead to savings in cost and programme and a significant reduction
in the carbon footprint of the project. Examples for this include re-use of existing foundations,
roads or walls, or, for a flood defence project for instance, the re-use of an existing lock structure
as part of new flood defence walls (see CIRIA publication Reuse of Foundations (C653, 2007)).
The volume of the structures would normally be worked out as part of the bills of quantities and,
where re-used, as part of an assessment of their suitability for re-use.
Examples also include the recovery of all stone in dry-stone walls that were in the way of a new
access road to a business park. Rather than the walls being bulldozed and excavated along with
other materials, the walls were dismantled, the stone stored carefully and then re-used in new
boundary walls and in facings to wingwalls for culverts under the new road. A triple-win resulted:
reduced off-site disposal; reduced new materials imported to the project; and the new walls and
wingwall facings blending more quickly into the landscape.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include inclusion in a Site Waste Management Plan (SWMP), site
photographs, construction drawings, and/or bills of quantities, along with some form of
substantiation of the percentage being claimed.
Evidence could include a comparison of design calculations with waste transfer notes or
other quantity surveying documentation. In any case, the percentage being claimed needs
some form of substantiation. Information should also be included within the SWMP.
CEEQUAL Ltd
115
8.7.5 (M) RECLAIMED OR RECYCLED MATERIALS

What percentage by volume of materials (excluding bulk fill and
sub-base) for use in the permanent works has been specified and
made from reclaimed or recycled material, whether reclaimed from
the site or elsewhere?
Client
Design
Construct
(i) Specified:
20% to <50%, score 2.
50% to <75%, score 5.
75% and above, score 8.
16 pts
(ii) Used:
20% to <50%, score 2.
50% to <75%, score 5.
Scope-out
Guidance

Examples include reclaimed bricks, and elements or components using recycled materials such
as recycled plastics or reprocessed timber. Recycled materials must satisfy the necessary
performance and quality criteria.
Where materials are re-used or recycled, the highest grade of re-use possible will be the most
environmentally beneficial. There are a number of opportunities to re-use or recycle materials:
Question
Guidance
re-using or recycling materials already on site in the new works (which also minimises
transport impacts);
bringing in reclaimed or recycled materials from off site without imposing high transport
impacts;
seeking opportunities for use elsewhere of reclaimed or recycled on-site materials that
cannot be used on site (also without imposing high transport impacts);
ensuring that opportunities for the re-use and recycling of materials at the end of the
structures lifetime are maximised.
Note that recent quality protocols for aggregates and composts now allow for up to a defined
percentage of secondary or previously used materials to be incorporated within an aggregate type
or soil conditioner. So simply specifying Type 1 material for a particular use may or may not
automatically include some re-used or recycled materials. See www.wrap.org.uk/construction for
more details and Quality Protocol checklist for producers and Quality Protocol checklist for
purchasers and specifiers.
WRAPs web-based guidance on Recycled Content and the Net Waste tool enables projects to
calculate the recycled content of a project and identify quick wins and benefits, after some
financial investment, to maximise the recycled content of materials used within construction
(http://www.wrap.org.uk/construction/tools_and_guidance/achieving_resource_efficiency/recycled
_content/index.html).
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of specification requirements. Any evidence needs to

substantiate the percentage being claimed.
8.7.6
RECLAIMED OR RECYCLED BULK FILL AND SUB-BASE

What percentage by volume of bulk fill and sub-base material
specified in the project was made from previously used material,
whether reclaimed from the site or elsewhere?
10 pts
Client
Design
Construct
(i) Specified:
Under 40%, score 0.
40% to <60%, score 2.
60% to <80%, score 3.
116
CEEQUAL Ltd
(ii) Used:
Under 40%, score 0.
40% to <60%, score 2.
60% to <80%, score 3.
If this was generated on site (for example, demolition material
crushed on site), score 1 additional point for specifying use of the
demolition material, and score a further 1 extra point for using it.
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out if the project used no bulk fill or sub-base.
Question
Guidance
See guidance for Question 8.7.5. Otherwise, no question-specific guidance provided.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could include bills of quantities, delivery notes, and/or a quantity surveyors
report, along with some form of substantiation of the percentage being claimed. WRAPs
Net Waste Tool can be used to forecast, monitor and capture actual performance.
8.8
Minimising use and impacts of hazardous materials
Minimising the use and impacts of hazardous materials is closely linked to health & safety considerations.
However, assessments undertaken to comply with the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations
(COSHH) can be extended to cover environmental aspects of those materials being assessed.
An example of such an environmental issue is the pre-treatment of preserved timber: on-site treatment, which is
often applied by non-specialist personnel, represents a hazard from environmental as well as health & safety
considerations, compared to treatment carried out under controlled conditions by trained specialists.
8.8.1
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
15 pts
Has an assessment been made at the design stage regarding the

substitution of hazardous materials with less hazardous materials?
Client
Design
Construct
15

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Clearly, the most environmentally beneficial approach is to avoid the use of hazardous
substances altogether and then to use products of a less hazardous nature where complete
substitution is not possible. Increasingly, manufacturers and suppliers are bringing to market
products with lower levels of hazardous substances or which contain substances of a less
hazardous nature. These include, for example, low-VOC coatings and treatments.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be a record that these issues have been considered and decisions acted
upon. Meeting notes or material specifications showing the decisions made would be
acceptable. It would also be acceptable to demonstrate that such requirements were
included in contract documents.
8.8.2
APPLICATION OF COATINGS
12 pts
Have all appropriate coatings and treatments for permanent work

materials been factory-applied (except for cut ends)?
Client
Design
Construct
12

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out if no coatings or treatments used, or if factory application is impossible or

impractical for example if coatings to in-situ concrete are the only coatings used on the
project.
Question
Guidance
Note that this question applies to all coatings for the permanent works, not just to timber coatings.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of specification or sub-contract requirements, plus

inspection reports or equivalent.
CEEQUAL Ltd
117
8.8.3
LOW-VOC AND/OR BIODEGRADABLE COATINGS

What percentage of all coatings and other treatments (for
temporary and permanent works) has been specified as low-VOC
and/or biodegradable and subsequently used as specified?
Client
Design
Construct
(i) Specified:
Under 10%, score 0.
10% to <40%, score 2.
40% to <80%, score 4.
12 pts
(ii) Used:
Under 10%, score 0.
10% to <40%, score 2.
40% to <80%, score 4.
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
See CIRIA publication The VOC handbook: Investigating, assessing and managing risks from
inhalation of VOCs at land affected by contamination (C682, 2009) for guidance. It should be
noted that low-VOC coatings and treatments are not always practical or appropriate for certain
applications. In cases such as these, this question should be scoped out.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of specification or sub-contract records. Any evidence

needs to substantiate the percentage being claimed.
8.8.4
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ASSESSMENTS
Client
Has the health and safety assessment process for hazardous

materials been:
(i) extended to cover the wider environmental impacts of
those materials? If Yes, score 3.
(ii) and have the results of this been used in drawing up the
SEMP or equivalent? If Yes, score 5.
If No, score 0.
8 pts
Design
Construct
Scope-out
Guidance
The decision by the Assessor and Verifier to scope out this question will depend on
whether there are any materials requiring COSHH assessments, or whether the team has
decided to assess the wider environmental impacts of those materials by another process.
Question
Guidance
In a UK context, the health and safety assessment process is covered by COSHH. An example of
a COSHH Assessment being extended to cover environmental impacts might be guidance on how
to store and dispose of materials to avoid pollution to the environment, as opposed to harm to
humans in health & safety terms.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence needs to show specifically the environmental impacts. Standard COSHH

assessment sheets are not acceptable. Evidence for part b) needs to demonstrate that
these requirements have been incorporated in other management documents, which could
include methods statements or toolbox talks.
8.9
Site Waste Management planning & legal compliance
The production and management of waste from construction and civil engineering projects is governed by a
large body of legislation, and as a minimum, must be adhered to.
The main aspect of waste management legislation related to CEEQUAL is the Duty of Care Code of Practice,
which requires waste producers to store, transport and dispose of waste without harming the environment. The
Duty of Care Code of Practice (issued under the Environmental Protection Act 1990) provides detailed
guidance on waste producers responsibilities. The Waste (England and Wales) Regulations 2011, which
transpose the requirements of the revised Waste Framework Directive, contain key changes for the industry
and users of CEEQUAL, including some amendments to the Duty of Care. The legislation requires a greater
focus on the waste hierarchy, revision to information on waste transfer notes or consignment notes (confirming
118
CEEQUAL Ltd
that the waste hierarchy has been applied), changes to the waste carriers system, provides for new exclusions
to waste management controls and transposes a national target to prepare 70% of non-hazardous construction
and demolition waste for re-use, recycling and other material recovery by 2020.
There is no definitive list of what constitutes waste, although the Waste Framework Directive defines waste as
any substance or object which the holder discards or intends or is required to discard. The CEEQUAL Manual
gives no definitions, and the assessment of waste management performance using CEEQUAL is based on
current good and best environmental practice, rather than legal provisions.
For the latest thinking on waste definitions and on how surplus materials (and materials made from processing
previously-used materials) should be treated under the law, read Definition of Waste: Development Industry
Code of Practice (Version 2) prepared by CL:AIRE (available from
http://www.claire.co.uk/index.php?option=com_phocadownload&view=file&id=212:initiatives&Itemid=82) or the
DEFRA publication ECJ Judgements: The definition of waste (2008) or visit
www.aggregain.org.uk/waste_management_regulations.
In certain circumstances an exemption from the Environmental Permitting Regulations (England and Wales)
2010 can be registered with the regulator to allow for the re-use or recycling of certain waste materials, for
example, if the waste can be put to a beneficial use elsewhere without causing any environmental risk or
damage. This should primarily be the responsibility of the Client and/or Designer in developing the scheme, as
early registration of an exemption will enable better project design and planning. It is, however, still possible for
the Contractor to register an exemption on projects where the Client or Designer has not done so, should they
identify a suitable opportunity for the re-use or recycling of waste. An activity that does not fall under the
conditions of an exemption requires a Permit; alternatively it may be able to be carried out using the CL:AIRE
Code of Practice v2 or a WRAP Quality Protocol.
Under the List of Waste Regulations (England) 2005, waste must be characterised as inert, non-inert/nonhazardous or hazardous. Individual waste types are listed in the Regulations and each waste type must be
identified in relation to the appropriate European Waste Catalogue codes and dealt with differently in
accordance with the relevant regulations. In this context, please also note the guidance in Section 6.2 regarding
Schedule 9 plants, some of which are classified as non-hazardous waste and need to be disposed of at suitably
licensed facilities.
The introduction of the Landfill Regulations has meant that the co-disposal of waste at landfills is no longer
permitted, and that a landfill site is no longer able to accept the following types of waste:
liquid waste (including wastewater, but excluding sludge);

waste that, in the conditions of the landfill site, is explosive, corrosive, oxidising or flammable;
hazardous or non-hazardous waste that has not been treated prior to disposal at landfill; and
whole or shredded tyres.
Finally, it must be recognised that very few projects for example an on-site bioremediation contract may
generate zero construction waste for off-site disposal, but waste will still be generated from canteen facilities
and plant & machinery maintenance and needs to be disposed of appropriately. A core aim with regard to waste
in the UK Governments Strategy for Sustainable Construction (2008) is to halve the quantity of waste sent to
landfill by 2012 based on 2008 levels.
Information on waste, including directories for England and Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland can be found
at http://www.netregs.gov.uk/netregs/1724261/?referrer=/netregs/.
8.9.1 (M) SITE WASTE MANAGEMENT PLANNING

8.9.1 a)
(M)
12 pts
Client
Has a Site Waste Management Plan (SWMP) or waste section of a

6
SEMP been prepared and updated as appropriate for the duration
of the project?
Design
Construct

8.9.1 b)
(M)
18 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Have the targets or key performance indicators for waste reduction

and waste recovery been met?
12

Although SWMPs are only a legal requirement in England, the development and
implementation of a SWMP is considered good practice even where regulations are not in
place. Therefore, this question should not be scoped out. This question will therefore still
remain mandatory should the Site Waste Management Regulations 2008 be withdrawn.
CEEQUAL Ltd
119
Under the Site Waste Management Plans Regulations 2008, SWMPs are required in England for
all projects with a construction value over 300,000. For guidance on Site Waste Management
Plans, see the Environment Agency website (www.environmentagency.gov.uk/static/documents/NetRegs/SWMP_Simple_Guide_Feb_2011.pdf). In Northern
Ireland SWMPs are required on public sector projects over 200,000.
In England the SWMP should be prepared in compliance with the Regulations. For all SWMPs,
irrespective of location, to score points on Question 8.9.1 a) the SWMP should be prepared at
least in compliance with the Regulations or in line with guidance in the Devolved Administration.
However, to score maximum points on this question it will have to go beyond simple compliance
and demonstrate good and best practice. SWMPs for projects outside England (including private
sector projects in Northern Ireland) should be prepared in line with best practice guidance either
using the resources developed by WRAP (see
http://www.wrap.org.uk/construction/tools_and_guidance/site_waste_management_planning/) or
those developed by the relevant regulatory authorities, industry bodies such as CIRIA, or by
companies such as BRE. It is also acceptable for organisations to use their own SWMP tools and
resources if it can be demonstrated that these go beyond simply complying with the Regulations.
Question
Guidance
It is good practice to initiate the SWMP at the design stage. The earlier in the project a SWMP is
implemented, the greater the benefits that can be achieved with regard to waste reduction,
recovery and recycling. Therefore, to score maximum points a SWMP should have been
developed by the Designers at design stage.
Forecasting waste streams as part of the SWMP process enables practical decisions to be taken
about segregating materials on site for recycling and/or for disposal, as well as for the layout of
site facilities, including waste storage. A properly prepared and maintained SWMP can be a
powerful tool to help plan waste management activities and waste movements off site during
construction. With properly managed supporting documentation, it can also help ensure
compliance with legislation around Duty of Care and other relevant waste management
legislation. SWMPs can also be used to record progress against targets and savings in materials
and waste disposal.
As with all such plans, the aim needs to be to clearly show the actions site staff and operatives
should take when dealing with waste (either surplus materials or genuine waste) in order to
maximise practical re-use and recycling, and to make landfill genuinely the disposal route of last
resort. Therefore, a properly implemented SWMP should also be accompanied by appropriate
communication between Clients, Designers and Contractors and subsequently with subContractors and other suppliers.
Evidence would normally be copies of the SWMP, including the appropriate evidence to
demonstrate that it has been updated, reviewed and implemented as appropriate.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence will also be required to show that waste reduction, recovery and recycling
actions have been implemented and targets achieved. These can include design details
and notes of meetings, data on waste collection and recycling rates, including waste
transfer notes and waste Contractor returns.
Note that failure to score against this question where regulations for SWMPs are in place
may affect the final Award grade if there has been a legal non-compliance.
120
CEEQUAL Ltd
8.9.2 (M) DUTY OF CARE
Client
Design
Is there evidence that all waste produced on site has been

managed to meet duty of care requirements?
10 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Construct
10
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score as follows:
All waste has been transported by Registered Waste Carriers,
score 2.
All Waste Transfer Notes (and consignment notes) have been
retained, score 2.
All waste has been taken to licensed, permitted or exempt facilities,
score 2.
Transfer or disposal sites have been checked to ensure they are
licensed to take the material, score 2.
Disposal or transfer sites have been checked to ensure the waste
was taken there, score 2.
In addition to the current legal requirement for SWMPs in England, there is a large body of
legislation relating to waste management and, as a minimum, this must be adhered to. The waste
producer, normally the Contractor but sometimes the Client, has a legal Duty of Care to ensure
that all waste produced on site is stored, transported and disposed of without harming the
environment.
Question
Guidance
The Environment Agency maintains a public register of Registered Waste Carriers, Permitted
facilities and Exempt sites in England and Wales at http://epr.environmentagency.gov.uk/ePRInternet/searchregisters.aspx.
In Scotland, SEPA maintains a database of waste carriers and brokers at
http://www.sepa.org.uk/waste/waste_regulation/waste_carriers_and_brokers/who_is_registered.a
spx. Information on Licensed and exempt sites in Scotland can be accessed using the public
register maintained by SEPA: http://www.sepa.org.uk/waste.aspx.
The equivalent information for Northern Ireland is provided by the Department of Environment
Northern Ireland http://www.doeni.gov.uk/niea/waste-home/public_reg.htm.
Evidence could include documentary evidence retained in a straightforward file record,
which should be available on site.
Evidence
Guidance
The file record should include copies of waste carriers certificates for all carriers of waste
materials, Waste Transfer Notes (or consignment notes for any special (or hazardous)
wastes), copies of Environmental Permits, Licenses and Exemptions for the sites to which
the waste is sent and/or documented evidence that waste has been transported to the
appropriate facility. This may include telephone checks, following trucks, and/or requiring
completed transfer or consignment notes to be returned on a daily basis.
8.9.3
TRANSFER STATION/RECYCLING CENTRE PERFORMANCE
21 pts
If transfer stations and/or recycling facilities were used, is there

evidence that the recycling rate of the facilities was considered
prior to placing the order?
Client
Design
Construct
21
If No, score 0. If recycling rate was considered, score as indicated.

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
This can be done by visiting the transfer station or recycling facility and completing an audit of
where the material is taken after sorting or processing, or asking them to submit waste returns,
which should be submitted to the Environment Agency quarterly.
CEEQUAL Ltd
121
Evidence
Guidance
Whichever way the checks are carried out, they must be documented and satisfy legal
requirements. If the project team has no direct control over the final destination of their
waste, then evidence from the Waste Management Contractor that demonstrates where
they will be taking the projects waste can be used.
8.9.4 (M) PERMITTING FOR WASTE TREATED OR USED ON SITE
14 pts
Client
Design
Have the appropriate permits, licenses or exemptions been

obtained for waste that has been treated on site or for waste
imported to site?
Construct
14

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Some on-site waste treatment activities, such as the treatment of contaminated soils prior to reuse, require an Environmental Permit, waste management license or registered exemption,
depending on the nature of the process employed. Similarly, the use of waste materials imported
to site might also require a permit, license or exemption.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence would include documentary evidence in a straightforward file record that the
appropriate permits, license or exemption has been obtained.
8.9.5
HAZARDOUS OR SPECIAL WASTE
8.9.5 a)
7 pts
Is there evidence that hazardous (special) waste has been

appropriately segregated (from other controlled waste) and stored
appropriately on site?
Client
Design
Construct

8.9.5 b)
7 pts
Has this waste been taken to a suitable facility and the construction
site registered as a hazardous waste producer where appropriate?

Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out only on projects with no hazardous waste (special waste in Scotland).
Question
Guidance
For guidance on this issue, see the guidance at the beginning of this Section 8.6. The site is
required to be registered as a hazardous waste producer only in England and Wales and if the
site is producing >500kg of hazardous waste per year.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be within a SWMP supported by hazardous waste consignment notes and
site photographs.
8.10 Wastes and management of arisings

Planning for waste management and the management of arisings, from the design stage and through
developing the SWMP, are crucial. An essential subsequent step is using the information in the SWMP as part
of the management of waste on site. The forecasts in the SWMP will enable practical decisions to be taken
about the materials to be segregated for recycling and/or for disposal, the methods by which segregation is
implemented, and the layout of site facilities, including waste storage.
This is also relevant to waste materials produced during site preparation, in particular with the emphasis on
limiting the amount of development on Greenfield sites. Development on Brownfield sites often requires
122
CEEQUAL Ltd
extensive site preparation works giving rise to a range of wastes that require proper management. However, it
can also offer the opportunity to re-use materials on site.
If possible, waste should be taken to a local waste processing or disposal facility to minimise transport impacts.
The location relative to the project of landfill and reprocessing sites should be established at the start of the
project to enable such judgements to be made. A balance needs to be struck and recorded between
distance to a landfill site and a greater distance to a recycling facility.
Waste management should be part of the training for all site managers to ensure they are aware of their legal
responsibilities, the actions and targets contained in the SWMP and the possibilities that exist for the prevention
and reduction of waste. It is important that all of the personnel working on site, whether directly employed by the
principal Contractor or a sub-contractor, are aware of their responsibilities for reducing the amount of waste
produced and for managing the waste that is produced in the correct manner.
8.10.1
CLEARANCE AND DISPOSAL OF EXISTING VEGETATION
8.10.1 a)
23 pts
Have the most environmentally beneficial ways of dealing with

clearance and disposal of existing vegetation been explored and
recommendations been made?
Client
Design
Construct
23

Have these recommendations been implemented for the majority of
vegetation cleared?
20
If not implemented, score 0.

If under 40% of recommendations implemented, score 0.
If 40% to <60% of recommendations implemented, score 5.
If 60% to <80% of recommendations implemented, score 10.
If 80% and above of recommendations implemented, score 20.
8.10.1 b)
20 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out only if no vegetation present on the site before work starts.
Question
Guidance
The best method for dealing with and/or disposing of vegetation that needs to be cleared depends
mainly on the type of vegetation involved. Options range from energy recovery, through chipping
for composting or to provide mulch, to leaving log piles to provide shelter for amphibians or small
mammals. If the vegetation contains noxious weeds or Schedule 9 plants, safe disposal according
to the relevant guidance is the only option. Note that it is important to ensure beneficial use of any
timber that has had to be felled to enable a project to proceed, ideally on the project itself but, if
that is not possible, on a suitable other project as close by as possible.
Question 8.10.1 a) Evidence needs to show that the type of vegetation has been
assessed and different options have been considered, leading to recommendations that
take account of the environmental benefit of the suggested method.
Evidence
Guidance
8.10.2
Question 8.10.1 b) Evidence will depend very much on the recommendations made but,
in any case, site records need to demonstrate implementation. Records could include
photographs, waste transfer notes, and/or evidence of exempt activity. Information should
also be included within the SWMP.
ON-SITE USE OF DEMOLITION ARISINGS

What percentage by volume of material from demolition or deconstruction on site has been incorporated into the project?
Client
Design
Construct
35
If less than 25%, score 0.

If 25% to 50%, score 7.
If 50% to 75%, score 14.
If 75% to 90%, score 21.
If >90%, score 35.
35 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out only if there was no demolition or deconstruction as part of the assessed works.
Question
Guidance
A single score is given across all three roles, because the Client or Designer may specify this
requirement, rather than just leave the Contractor to choose to do it.
CEEQUAL Ltd
123
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should be found in quantity surveyors documentation or project accounts. The

evidence provided should substantiate the percentage being claimed.
8.10.3
BENEFICIAL RE-USE OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
Client
What percentage by volume of excavated material has been

beneficially re-used on-site?
35 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Design
Construct
35
If up to 30% re-used, score 0.

If >30% to 50% re-used, score 14.
If > 50% to 90% re-used, score 21.
If > 90% re-used, score 28.
If 100% re-used, score 35.
Scope out only if the project produced no excavation arisings.
Design for re-use and recovery of materials already on site is fundamental to achieving materials
resource efficiency, minimising the quantities of materials that have to be imported or exported
from site. The ability to score for the design stage in this question reflects the importance of this
stage in identifying and specifying materials for re-use especially as it is rarely possible to amend
the design at construction stage to take advantage of any surplus excavation arisings.
Re-use near the site, as opposed to on the site, is covered in Questions 8.10.4 and 8.10.5 on
diversion of waste away from landfill. Re-use of excavated materials off site includes taking
material to landfill if the material is genuinely inert and is used for beneficial re-use, such as for
capping and other engineering purposes.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence should include some form of calculation to demonstrate the points being
awarded. This calculation could be on the basis of design calculations compared to
information documented in the Site Waste Management Plan or equivalent and actual
waste transfer notes or some other form of quantity surveying documentation.
8.10.4
INERT WASTE DIVERTED FROM LANDFILL

What percentage by volume of inert waste material has been
segregated (on or off site) in accordance with the SWMP and
diverted from landfill?
15 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Client
Design
Construct
15

If 70% to <85%, score 5.
If 85% to <95%, score 10.
Scoping-out of this question is unlikely. The decision by the Assessor and Verifier on
whether to scope out this question will depend on the nature, scale, location and context
of the project.
As a minimum waste should be segregated into inert, non-hazardous and hazardous fractions this
can happen either on site or at a Waste Transfer Station. If the latter then the waste contractors
activities must be checked to ensure they are rigorously segregating waste. It must be
remembered that even if the waste contractor offers and is capable of delivering high levels of
segregation and recycling, this may not be the best option for the project as some wastes will
have an economic value and could be beneficially resold directly by the project, although it must
be noted that this may well require additional Environmental Permits to be applied for and gained.
All liquid wastes should be kept in appropriate containers, not poured onto other wastes, which
would make them, if nothing else, unusable or unsuitable for re-processing. Such minimal
segregation will ensure at the very least the lowest rate of landfill tax is paid on the genuinely inert
material, and that hazardous wastes are dealt with at least as carefully as the virgin materials
from which they were manufactured.
The aim here is to reward projects that go beyond such minima, and either capture the recyclable
wastes identified in the SWMP dealt with under Question 8.9.1, or take the minimum of three
124
CEEQUAL Ltd
waste streams described above to a construction and demolition waste recycling centre nearby,
where the re-usable and recyclable materials are extracted. It is acknowledged that there may be
areas of the country where the commercial infrastructure for re-use and recycling is limited, but it
is developing fast through a variety of initiatives such as those operated or promoted by WRAP
(www.wrap.org.uk). Where mixed non-hazardous wastes are sent off site to be separated for
recycling, it is good practice to obtain evidence from the waste contractor of the amounts and/or
proportions of collected waste that have been recycled or recovered.
It should be noted that any on-site re-use of waste must be undertaken in accordance with the
Environmental Permitting Regulations as certain activities, such as crushing and screening of
inert waste, may require either an Environmental Permit or an Exemption. Examples for diverting
waste from landfill can include waste sent for reprocessing, recovery for suitable use (used on an
exempt site) or recovered in an energy-from-waste plant.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be within a site waste management plan supported by waste consignment
notes and site photographs. Note that failure to score against this question may affect the
final award grade if there has been a legal non-compliance.
8.10.5
NON-HAZARDOUS WASTE DIVERTED FROM LANDFILL
Client
Design
What percentage by volume of non-hazardous waste material has

been segregated (on or off site) in accordance with the SWMP and
diverted from landfill?
21 pts
Construct
21

If 60% to <75%, score 7.
If 75% to <95%, score 14.
Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
See guidance for Question 8.10.4.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be in the form of waste transfer notes, photographs showing the different
segregated groups or waste contractor returns showing the proportion of waste
segregated for recycling or recovery.
8.10.6
(M)
SURPLUS MATERIALS
23 pts
Client
Has an assessment been undertaken and implemented to reduce

the amount of surplus materials ordered?
Design
Construct
23

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
Over-ordering is still standard practice within construction but it can contribute to the overall
wastage rates if materials become surplus to requirements. Reducing over-ordering can help
reduce the amount of waste produced as well as saving money. Examples of actions to reduce
over-ordering include targeting accurate ordering (accurate material requirements, realistic
wastage rates), logistics planning (delivery strategy, adequate storage, efficient movement of
materials to the workface) or installation elements (efficient working and installation and storage of
offcuts for reuse).
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence would include documented evidence that material forecasting and logistics
planning have been undertaken, which clearly illustrates how over-ordering has been
addressed.
CEEQUAL Ltd
125
8.10.7
(M)
23 pts
MATERIALS STORAGE
Client
Design
Is there evidence that materials have been stored appropriately to

avoid wastage?
Construct
23
If No score 0. If Yes, score as indicated.

Scope-out
Guidance
Question
Guidance
For guidance on this issue, see CIRIA: Environmental good practice on site guide (third edition)
(C692, 2010).
Evidence
Guidance
This could be photographic evidence or site records. The Verifier should ascertain that
photographs demonstrate a sustained achievement of this question for the duration of the
project.
8.10.8
(M)
BENEFICIAL RE-USE OF SURPLUS MATERIALS

What percentage of unused (surplus) materials* have been
beneficially re-used (or stored for re-use)?
18 pts
Scope-out
Guidance
Client
Design
Construct
18

If 50% to <70%, score 6.
If 70% to <90%, score 9.
No or minimal unused materials**, score 18.
* Unused (surplus) materials are any construction materials not used within the project (such as
bricks, concrete, reinforcing mesh, timber and/or prefabricated components), but can also include
bulk materials that are not only usable without processing, but are also movable to a site where
such use is made of them. For the purposes of this question, the definition of re-use is that given
in the Waste Framework Directive, i.e. any operation by which products or components that are
not waste are used again for the same purpose for which they were conceived.
** To score at this level, the evidence must demonstrate that the assessment in Question 8.10.6
was fully implemented and no or minimal unused materials were generated.
Question
Guidance
Unused materials are, regrettably, almost inevitable on any civil engineering project, but this
question is in no way meant to encourage their accumulation, nor to encourage breakages, just to
score points for their re-use elsewhere.
Some unused materials can be stored and re-used at another site or it may be possible to donate
them to a local group or community project seek advice from the Environment Agency, SEPA,
NIEA or other appropriate regulator first. For others this may not be practicable, but they may still
be crushed and used as sub-base or fill (i.e. recycled in order to re-use the base material of which
they were made).
The level that can be considered no surplus or minimal surplus materials is related to the scale of
the project and may require discussion between the Assessor and Verifier. Deciding the
percentage of recycled or re-used materials will also require the Assessor and Verifier to make,
and justify, a judgement on the value or volume of the project, but not necessarily calculate it.
Evidence
Guidance
126
Evidence can include records that show that surplus materials have been taken to another
site for use, compared with waste disposal records. Any records need to substantiate the
percentage being claimed. A declaration made by the Contractor as to how surplus
materials have been used and/or disposed of would be acceptable. The exact score and
evidence acceptable must be at the discretion of the Verifier.
CEEQUAL Ltd
Section 9: Transport
9. TRANSPORT
9.1
Basic principles
$ A process note for Section 9: It is important to stress that this section needs to be applied slightly
differently depending on the which of the following three kinds of project is being assessed:
Projects that are creating, amending or refurbishing elements of the transport network (such as
roads, railways or canals);
Projects that will become destinations (such as stadia);
Projects that generate very little operational traffic (such as water treatment plants, wastewater
treatment plants, and flood defence banks).
It is important for the Assessor and Verifier to agree during the scoping-out meeting which group the
project being assessed fits under and therefore how the questions in this section will be applied. Note
that some projects such as railway stations may be both part of one transport network (railways)
but a destination for another network (such as roads).
The movement of goods and people is a means by which other community goals are achieved. In delivering
such benefits to human well-being and the economy, transport either causes or enables a wide range of other
effects such as land use change, road accidents, air, noise and water pollution, as well as the consumption of
resources.
Striking the best balance between the benefits and adverse impacts can be particularly challenging for transport
effects. For example, the World Health Organisation estimates that seven times more people die because of
traffic-based pollution than as a result of road collisions, and transport can be one of the most pervasive
sources of noise in the environment, with the EU estimating that 20% of the European Unions population suffer
from unacceptable noise levels. Yet no one suggests that the human race should stop travelling because of
these effects. Instead, reducing the impacts of travel and reducing the level of avoidable travel is a major driver
for many people and organisations.
Some civil engineering projects (for example, minor flood defence schemes) will only generate small amounts
of traffic during construction and maybe none during operation, and therefore have a negligible adverse effect
on this aspect. However, most civil engineering projects will have some effect upon transport, either from the
movement of goods or people during construction or operation, or through the construction of transport
infrastructure. A separate consideration is that many civil engineering projects are in themselves transport
projects, with a wide range of scales and impacts from localised improvements to the network such as
junction improvements to major upgrading of strategic parts of the transport network.
The assessment questions in Section 9 address all modes of transport and both construction and operational
impacts. Across the construction stage, transport impacts include the movement of construction materials and
waste, and construction workforce transport and parking, as well as disruption to all other users of the highway
network during the construction period. Operational transport impacts include those from the operational
workforce (if any) and the movement of materials, and these need to be considered alongside issues
associated with the management of the transport system. These latter aspects include the ability of the system
to recover from abnormal incidents as well as its resilience and capacity to additional movements caused by the
project.
An emphasis is placed upon designing out both construction and operational impacts on the level of service
offered by the transport infrastructure. The application of design techniques that demonstrate consideration of
the issues beyond the automatic application of design manuals or codes of practice is sought. Emphasis is also
placed upon evidence of engagement with communities.
The term transport network has been deliberately selected instead of highway network in order that
consideration is given to the effects upon all modes of transport and infrastructure, and to focus on the
opportunities to create a truly integrated system.
CEEQUAL Ltd
127
9.1.1 (M) RELATIONSHIP TO THE TRANSPORT NETWORK

(i) In the case of a transport project, does the project provide
improved levels of service and does it extend to all modes
in a way that delivers improved integration?
Client
Design
Construct
18
Score 2 points for each of the following 9 modes:

18 pts
Car or Van, HGV, Bus, Bicycle, Walking,

Equestrian, Rail, Aviation, Water.
(ii) In the case of a non-transport project, has the site been
selected because the project a) requires no or minimal new
transport infrastructure and/or b) mainly makes use of
public transport systems?
If No, score 0.
If Yes, score 18 for a) or b) as applicable.
Scope-out
Guidance
Question can be scoped out for projects having no permanent effect on the level of service
provided by existing transport networks.
Question
Guidance
A sustainable project places few demands on the construction of new transport infrastructure and
existing services. Where additional demands exist or are justified, then it is important that they be
matched by increased transport capacity that enables no significant loss in the level of service
available to existing users.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence could be found in an Environmental Statement or Transport Impact Assessment.
9.1.2
TRANSPORT EFFECTS OF THE COMPLETED PROJECT
28 pts
Has the project team considered and incorporated measures that

reduce relevant, transport-related impacts of the completed project
on the local community?
Client
Design
Construct
28

Scope-out
Guidance
The question can be scoped out for projects that:

generate no additional traffic impact, (for example flood defences or pipelines);
and/or
where the project is wholly or essentially a refurbishment.
Road schemes may score if they reduce the overall volume of traffic by, for example, developing
bus or cycle lanes. In addition, redesigning a junction may make that part of the road network
more-efficient, thus reducing congestion and thus emissions. Such projects are now considered to
be an important part of the better management of the road network so, if this can be
demonstrated, then points should be awarded.
Question
Guidance
Evidence
Guidance
128
The issues that could be relevant include:

i. Severance;
ii. Ease of use (signs and communications);
iii. Safety;
iv. Congestion;
v. Parking spaces;
vi. Inconvenience.
Evidence could be found in an Environmental Statement, Transport Impact Study,
drawings and plans.
CEEQUAL Ltd
9.1.3
ACCESS FOR PEDESTRIANS AND CYCLISTS

Has there been consultation on, or consideration given to, the
ability of pedestrians and cyclists to pass through the site on
dedicated paths and to establishing links with existing and
proposed routes to local services?
19 pts
Client
Design
Construct
19

Scope-out
Guidance
This question applies to any site that was publicly accessible prior to development. It can
be scoped out where the site is of necessity a secure site where public access is
inappropriate.
When introducing a new built feature into the landscape, issues regarding public access and
security need to be addressed during the planning and design stages. If a scheme results in the
closing-off to the public of previously accessible areas, there has to be a trade-off between the
loss of accessible land and the provision of public access. This could be the provision of new
access routes, such as bridleways, cycle paths or walkways, or the enhancement of existing
routes or amenity features. Consideration of the balance can also result in preventing public
access on health & safety grounds and to avoid nuisance.
Question
Guidance
Please note that this question applies to any site that was publicly accessible prior to development
for formal or informal amenity use, for example, for walking, dog walking or as informal play area.
Such areas, even where not formally protected, can have an important amenity value for the local
community and some compensation for the loss of that amenity should be made where possible.
Any such compensation scheme should also include maintenance arrangements to ensure its
long-term success.
For road projects, public space should refer to space provided for community benefit rather than
road users.
Evidence
Guidance
9.2
Evidence could include consultation meetings with councils or other local groups, or
evidence from drawings or other design documents that show consideration of open
space and/or public access.
Operational Transport
9.2.1
NEED FOR ADDITIONAL TRANSPORT INFRASTRUCTURE
26 pts
Does the project require provision of, or increase the need for,
additional transport infrastructure?
Client
Design
Construct
26

This question should be scoped out for projects that are on or creating new elements of
transport infrastructure.
Scope-out The question can also be scoped out for civil engineering projects that generate no
Guidance additional impacts from traffic. Examples include flood defences, pipelines, and new water
or sewage treatment works where, after construction, traffic may well be reduced as fewer
staff may work on the new plant. Minor access works can be scoped out.
Question
Guidance
The question is not necessarily about demand on the transport network but the ability of the
transport network to absorb any demand the project places on the network. A project with
significant demands that can be absorbed by existing transport infrastructure can score, whereas
a more-modest project that requires additional transport infrastructure will not.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence is likely to be in the report of a Traffic Impact Assessment or similar.
CEEQUAL Ltd
129
9.2.2
ENHANCED OPERATIONAL TRANSPORT OUTCOMES
9.2.2 a)
11 pts
Is there evidence from the design process that Designers have

worked beyond the standards specified in the design codes to
deliver enhanced operational transport outcomes?
Client
Design
Construct
11

9.2.2 b)
21 pts
Is there evidence from the design process that the community

affected by the project has been involved in specifying the design
objectives?
21

Scope-out No specific guidance. The decision by the Assessor and Verifier on whether to scope out
Guidance this question will depend on the nature, scale, location and context of the project.
Suitable evidence would be where departures from standards have been sought from the
regulatory authorities, or where a novel technique or approach has been adopted that does not
feature as standard industry practice.
Question
Guidance
Community engagement in the project specification may be demonstrable from the identification
of projects within local plans or consultation with the community on the design objectives to be
applied before the design process commences. Hence, consultation events would need to be held
at the project inception rather than at the optioneering or project consent stage.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence is likely to be in the form of minutes of meetings or other reports documenting

consideration of alternative approaches or community engagement.
9.2.3
RESILIENCE OF THE TRANSPORT NETWORK
16 pts
Has the resilience and recovery of the transport network been

considered during the design process?
Client
Design
Construct

Scope-out Question can be scoped out where the project has little or no impact upon the transport
Guidance network.
Question
Guidance
Resilience and recovery of the transport network is to be considered in terms of the ability of the
asset to return to normal levels of service following severe weather, terrorism and unusual events.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence would be expected in the Environmental Statement or Transport Impact Study

Report.
9.2.4
ADAPTABILITY OF THE TRANSPORT NETWORK
14 pts
Is there evidence that the design delivers a transport network with

improved ability to accommodate future change?
Client
Design
Construct

Scope-out Question can be scoped out where the project has little or no impact upon the transport
Guidance network.
Question
Guidance
This question seeks to recognise that enhancements to the transport network may incorporate
some level of future-proofing. It also recognises that a project may deliver benefits for other
planned projects such as through financial contributions or additional capacity.
Future-proofing is to be considered in terms of the projects design life, adaptability, allowance for
future provision and aiding delivery of future projects.
Evidence
Guidance
130
Evidence is likely to be included in the Environmental Statement or Transport Impact

Study Report.
CEEQUAL Ltd
9.2.5
PERFORMANCE FOR NON-MOTORISED USERS
Client
Design
Construct
Is there evidence that the project team has provided measures that
11
improve the level of performance for non-motorised users either
within or outside the project site?
If no measure taken, score 0.
If measures taken to mitigate adverse impacts such that the net
effect is no change, score 2.
If measures taken that provide enhancements for
able-bodied people, score a further 3.
If measures taken include enhancements for vulnerable
members of the community, score a further 6.
11 pts
Scope-out This question can be scoped out where the project has little or no impact upon all modes
Guidance of transport.
Question
Guidance
With an increasingly elderly population who will be less mobile, measures that ease their transport
needs are to be recognised. In addition to the elderly members of the population, vulnerable
members also include children, women and those with mobility difficulties.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence is likely to be in the form of plans, drawings and photographs to demonstrate

delivery. Consideration of the needs of such members of society during adverse weather
and at night should be part of the evidence provided.
9.3
Construction transport, including nuisance and disruption
Traffic and transport of goods, materials and staff to and from a construction site can cause considerable
nuisance to local people. Delivery lorries, in particular, can cause local air pollution, create noise and vibration,
and can spread dirt onto roads and even onto neighbouring property. They can also be a hazard to other road
users and pedestrians.
The Traffic Management Act 2004 should be followed. Measures to be considered include the timing of
deliveries to avoid vehicles queuing up or to provide a designated queuing area or a waiting area some
distance from the site to avoid nuisance and disruption to traffic flows.
Traffic generated by site personnel may be addressed by designated parking areas or by promoting alternative
staff transport arrangements, such as park & ride or car-sharing schemes.
Site roads should be managed to minimise pollution they can create, such as dust and silt run-off into drains
and watercourses.
Finally, the impacts of any traffic management measures (such as road closures, diversions or temporary traffic
lights, necessary during the construction works) needs to be considered and their effects minimised.
9.3.1 (M) PLANNING CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC MOVEMENTS

11 pts
Have construction traffic movements been reviewed or considered

by the project team prior to the construction stage commencing?
Client
Design
Construct
11

Scope-out
Guidance
The consequences of construction traffic upon all modes of transport, including on cycling and
walking as well as vulnerable members of society, must be part of the consideration to score.
Question
Evidence could be baseline study data (a stand-alone report or produced as part of an EIA) but,
Guidance
where appropriate, could also be minutes of meetings where the issue has been actively
considered.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence is likely to be found in a TIA, ES and/or contract documentation.
CEEQUAL Ltd
131
9.3.2
TRANSPORT EFFECTS OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES

Has the project team incorporated measures that deliver improved
performance on the following effects of construction activities on
the local community?
20 pts
Client
Design
Construct
20
If none, score 0.
If measures have been incorporated,
score as indicated below for each effect tackled:
Reducing severance, score 5.
Ease of use of signs and other communications, score 3.
Improved safety, score 5.
Reduced congestion, score 4.
Reduction of available parking spaces, score 3.
Scope-out Scope out only for self-contained sites that do not require access to public highways nor
Guidance disrupt the rights of way network.
Question
Guidance
This can be achieved, for example, by assessing the transport impacts of materials delivery and
construction staff travel, considering options for site access and transport routes. Consideration of
alternative means of transport for materials (other than by road) is considered in Question 9.3.5.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence is likely to be in the form of drawings, plans or photographs that demonstrates

the incorporation of measures that reduce the effects upon local communities.
9.3.3
MINIMISING DISRUPTION FROM CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC
24 pts
Have measures been included in the project specification and

construction management that minimise disruption caused by
construction traffic, whether on the public network, from
construction vehicles on site, or on both?
Client
Design
Construct
18
If no measures, score 0.
For measures included in the project design, score 6.
For measures delivered during the construction stage, score 18.
Scope-out No specific guidance. The decision by the Assessor and Verifier on whether to scope out
Guidance this question will depend on the nature, scale, location and context of the project.
This question focuses upon the movement of construction materials and waste rather than the
movement of the construction teams, which is considered in Section 9.4. In addition, it is
important to recognise that noise and dust nuisance may be caused by internal haul roads as well
Question as by the effects of construction traffic upon the transport network.
Guidance Measures by the Client or Contractor could include a contractual ability to impose sanctions on
the company causing an infringement or hard enforcement measures, such as local liaison and/or
cameras. Further measures at construction stage could include direction signage, and route
planning to avoid particular roads.
Evidence
Guidance
Evidence is likely to be drawn from the commitments made in the Environmental

Statement, the evidence supporting the planning application, the specifications or terms &
conditions that the tendering Contractors are operating under, or the transport sections of
a Construction Environmental Management Plan or similar document.
9.3.4
SUCCESS IN MINIMISING CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC IMPACTS
13 pts
Is there evidence available at the end of the construction stage to

demonstrate that measures to minimise the impacts of construction
traffic have been monitored and been successful?
Client
Design
Construct
13
If No, score 0.
If monitored, score 5.
If successful, score a further 8.
132
CEEQUAL Ltd
Scope-out
Guidance
Scope out for projects with little in the way of construction traffic.
Question
Guidance
This question is focused on successful implementation of the measures outlined in Question

9.3.3.
It is accepted that proving success in these situations is difficult because there is no
control project running alongside the one with the measures in place, and because of the
challenge of proving that an issue has been minimised.
Evidence
Guidance
However, a combination of demonstrating the measures were aimed at minimising impacts

and that they have been achieved (for example using video clips and photographs) is what
is being sought here. In addition, a signed statement by the Project Director to confirm the
absence of complaints may also be appropriate.
9.3.5 (M) MOVEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

Has the project team considered possible use of other, moresustainable transport routes (other than road), such as rail and/or
water, for the movement of construction materials and/or waste?
9.3.5 a)
(M)
4 pts
Client
Design
Construct

9.3.5 b)
7 pts
Has the outcome of this assessment implemented some or all of

7
the measures?
Scope-out
Guidance
Question a) is Mandatory. Question 9.3.5 b) may be scoped out if the analysis used to
answer Question 9.3.5 a) shows that no such alternatives are either available or would be
appropriate on the project.
Question
Guidance
The project team needs to demonstrate that appropriate alternatives have been considered, even
if they are apparently extreme. For example, the use of helicopters to transport materials and or
equipment to a remote, sensitive site to avoid building of a temporary haul road may be
acceptable, but needs to be fully justified.
In considering this question, the movement of materials not just to and from the construction site
should be considered, but also the effect that the supply chain may have on the movement of
major elements of the project components.
Evidence
Guidance
9.4
Evidence will need to be shown in the Clients requirements or in design and/or site
records to demonstrate consideration of alternative transport methods.
Minimising workforce travel
Major civil engineering or public realm projects can result in a large workforce being assembled at a specific
location. This workforce may be drawn from locations many miles from the project and can even outnumber the
local population. Large distances may be travelled each day to and from work, generating traffic on local roads
and leading to increased pollution and traffic congestion locally, as well as contributing to the overall problem of
CO2 emissions globally.
By employing local people, distances travelled to and from work can be reduced, thus minimising the disruption
caused to local communities. In addition, the project may be perceived in a more-positive light if it provides local
employment. The provision of organised transport to deliver the workforce to the site can further reduce the
number of vehicular movements. Alternatively, the provision of on-site accommodation can be considered for
members of the construction staff who are not local to the site.
CEEQUAL Ltd
133
9.4.1 (M) WORKFORCE TRAVEL PLANNING
9.4.1 a)
(M)
12 pts
Client
Is there a travel plan in place for each of the organisations

4
responsible for delivering the project that is aimed at an appropriate
balance of effectiveness for the travellers, and at minimising
adverse environmental and social impacts associated with the
travel involved?
Design
Construct
(i) Client organisation;

(ii) Design teams;
(iii) Lead construction Contractor.
9.4.1 b)
(M)
12 pts
For each travel plan identified in Question 9.4.1 a), have the Plans
been successfully implemented for each of the project team
organisations?
(i) Client organisation;

(ii) Design teams;
(iii) Lead construction Contractor.
Scope-out
Guidance
Even if movements by the Client organisation or design team are modest compared to those at
the construction stage, these travel plans are felt to be helpful in not only reducing adverse
impacts but in setting a tone for the project team.
Question
Guidance
Distance and carbon emissions are both significant, so distance and form of travel are relevant,
and, hence, executive travel by air would be considered a potentially a very significant movement.
Appropriate measures may include, for example, access to public transport links, provision of a
minibus, provision of temporary accommodation, encouraging car-pooling or prescribing specific
routes for journeys (including access arrangements, compounds, parking and public transport).
Evidence is required that demonstrates that the need for travel plans has been considered
rather than evidence of the number of movements by particular transport modes.
Evidence
Guidance
134
For implementation, evidence could be reports on numbers of workforce travelling to work

by car as opposed to public transport, car counts compared to total number of workforce
employed on site or similar.
CEEQUAL Ltd
www.ceequal.com
CEEQUAL was developed by a team led by the Institution of Civil Engineers, supported by the Institutions Research & Developm
Development
ent
Enabling Fund and the UK Government. The Scheme is now operated through CEEQUAL Ltd, which is owned by a group of fourteen
organisations
nisations actively involved in the Scheme or in the project that developed it, including the ICE, ACE, CIWEM and CECA
CECA.
www.ceequal.com
CEEQUAL was developed by a team led by the Institution of Civil Engineers, supported by the Institutions Research & Developm
Development
ent
Enabling Fund and the UK Government. The Scheme is now operated through CEEQUAL Ltd, which is owned by a group of fourteen
organisations
nisations actively involved in the Scheme or in the project that developed it, including the ICE, ACE, CIWEM and CECA
CECA.

CEEQUAL V5 Assessment Manual For UK Ireland Projects - FINAL 24-08-12 With Covers

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEEQUAL V5 Assessment Manual For UK Ireland Projects - FINAL 24-08-12 With Covers

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEEQUAL V5 Assessment Manual For UK Ireland Projects - FINAL 24-08-12 With Covers

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CEEQUAL

Assessment Manual for

What is different in Version 5 of the Assessment Manual for Projects?

Technical queries about operation of the Scheme

Version 5 for distribution, August 2012

CEEQUAL Assessment Manual for UK & Ireland Projects

Explanation of sets of initials

People and Communities

Land Use and Landscape

The Historic Environment

Ecology and Biodiversity

Version 5 for distribution, August 2012

CEEQUAL Assessment Manual for UK & Ireland Projects

The Water Environment

Physical Resources Use and Management

Document Revision /Issue History

Reason for Issue

Approved for Issue

Upgrade from Version 4

Version 5 for distribution, August 2012

CEEQUAL Assessment Manual for UK & Ireland Projects

Explanation of sets of initials

Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty

Institute of Historic Building Conservation

Version 5 for distribution, August 2012

CEEQUAL Assessment Manual for UK & Ireland Projects

Section 1: Project Strategy

Version 5 for distribution, August 2012

Section 1: Project Strategy

CEEQUAL Assessment Manual for UK & Ireland Projects

1.1 Overall strategy for the project concept and design

1.1.1 (M) PRINCIPLES OF SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT

Is there evidence that the Client and Designer have actively

If No, score 0. If Yes, score as indicated.

None Question is Mandatory.

Version 5 for distribution, August 2012

CEEQUAL Assessment Manual for UK & Ireland Projects

Section 1: Project Strategy

Evidence could be a sustainable development policy that cascades into a project

Version 5 for distribution, August 2012

Section 1: Project Strategy

CEEQUAL Assessment Manual for UK & Ireland Projects

1.1.2 (M) ECONOMIC IMPACTS AND BENEFITS ASSESSMENT

Is there evidence that the Client and/or Designers have undertaken

(i) Promoting other beneficial development

Is there evidence that, where appropriate, actions to support the

If No, score 0. If Yes, score as indicated.

Version 5 for distribution, August 2012

CEEQUAL Assessment Manual for UK & Ireland Projects

1.1.3 (M) SOCIAL IMPACTS AND BENEFITS ASSESSMENT

Section 1: Project Strategy

Is there evidence that the Client and/or the Designers have

(i) Renewal and revitalisation of the social fabric of the

Is there evidence that, where appropriate, actions to support the

If No, score 0. If Yes, score as indicated.

Version 5 for distribution, August 2012

Section 1: Project Strategy

CEEQUAL Assessment Manual for UK & Ireland Projects

1.1.4 (M) ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND BENEFITS ASSESSMENT